Service Manual - WordPress.com...Service Manual - 8/226 - ® SYMAP_ServiceManual_v3.0_E.docx SYMAP...

Service Manual

- Power Protection - Monitoring - Diesel Control

- Power Management

SYMAP®

Service Manual

- 2/226 - SYMAP_ServiceManual_v3.0_E.docx SYMAP®

FOR THIS DOCUMENT WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS. WITHOUT OUR CONSENT IN WRITING IT SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED BY ANY MEANS NOR BE MADE ACCESSIBLE TO THIRD PARTIES. ANY VIOLATION WILL BE SUBJECT TO CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. THE CONTENT OF THIS MANUAL IS FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY. THE CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY STUCKE ELEKTRONIK GMBH. STUCKE ELEKTRONIK GMBH ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS DOCUMENTATION.

Doku.-version: v3.0 issue: 10.12.2013(IH) File: SYMAP_ServiceManual_v3.0_E.docx Firmware: CU: 1.10 / 17.09.2013 MU: 1.10 / 27.09.2013 RU: 1.10 / 12.08.2011 Parameter Tool SPT: v1.040

Service Manual

SYMAP®

SYMAP_ServiceManual_v3.0_E.docx - 3/226 -

Table of content

1 Parameter settings introduction ................................................................................ 10 1.1 Change of settings ........................................................................................................ 10 1.2 Event system introduction ............................................................................................. 10 1.3 Graphical Quick User Guide – e.g. SYMAP®-Y ............................................................. 11

2 System settings .......................................................................................................... 16 2.1 Codes ........................................................................................................................... 17 2.2 General Parameter ....................................................................................................... 18 2.3 Nominal Ratio Values ................................................................................................... 26 2.4 Communication ............................................................................................................. 31 2.5 Analog Inputs ................................................................................................................ 36 2.5.1 PT100 Inputs ................................................................................................................ 38 2.6 Binary Inputs ................................................................................................................. 41 2.6.1 Wire fault alarm ............................................................................................................. 43 2.7 Analogous Outputs ....................................................................................................... 44 2.8 Binary Outputs .............................................................................................................. 48 2.8.1 Shunt #1 output ............................................................................................................ 48 2.8.2 Shunt #2 output ............................................................................................................ 49 2.8.3 Lockout relay ................................................................................................................ 50 2.8.4 Synchron ON output ..................................................................................................... 51 2.8.5 Function outputs ........................................................................................................... 52 2.9 Event Builder ................................................................................................................ 53 2.10 Power management (main menu) ................................................................................. 54 2.10.1 General PM Parameter ................................................................................................. 55 2.10.2 Power management ...................................................................................................... 62 2.10.3 Load sharing ................................................................................................................. 66 2.10.4 Frequency controller ..................................................................................................... 71 2.10.5 Voltage regulator .......................................................................................................... 75 2.10.6 Power factor controller .................................................................................................. 78 2.10.7 Big consumer request (BCR) ........................................................................................ 80 2.10.8 Blackout ........................................................................................................................ 83 2.10.9 Engine control ............................................................................................................... 87 2.10.10 Starting phase ............................................................................................................... 90 2.10.11 Stopping phase ............................................................................................................. 93 2.10.12 Preferential trip limits/Abnormal BUS condition ............................................................. 98 2.10.13 Additional limits ........................................................................................................... 101

3 Relay settings ........................................................................................................... 104 3.1 ANSI 15 – Matching device (motorpoty) ...................................................................... 106 3.2 ANSI 24 – Overexcitation Relay .................................................................................. 112 3.3 ANSI 25 /A – Automatic Synchronizing ....................................................................... 113 3.4 ANSI 27 – Undervoltage Relay ................................................................................... 121 3.5 ANSI 27 B – BUS undervoltage relay .......................................................................... 123 3.6 ANSI 32 – Overload Relay .......................................................................................... 124 3.7 ANSI 37 – Undercurrent Relay (motor) ....................................................................... 126 3.8 ANSI 40 Q – Loss of Excitation Relay ......................................................................... 127 3.9 ANSI 46 /RP – Negative Sequence Relay / Rotor Protection ..................................... 129 3.10 ANSI 47 – Phase sequence voltage relay ................................................................... 135 3.11 ANSI 49 – Thermal Overload ...................................................................................... 136 3.11.1 Thermal overload I (general) ....................................................................................... 136 3.11.2 Thermal overload II (user) ........................................................................................... 139 3.11.3 Thermal overload III (interval) ..................................................................................... 141 3.12 ANSI 50 BF – Breaker Failure ..................................................................................... 142 3.13 ANSI 50 – Instantaneous overcurrent relay ................................................................. 143 3.14 ANSI 50G/N – Instantaneous ground overcurrent relay............................................... 145

Service Manual


3.15 ANSI 51 – AC time overcurrent relay .......................................................................... 147 3.16 ANSI 51G/N – AC time ground overcurrent relay ........................................................ 151 3.17 ANSI 51 LR – Locked Rotor ........................................................................................ 153 3.18 ANSI 59 – Overvoltage relay ....................................................................................... 155 3.19 ANSI 59 B – BUS overvoltage relay ............................................................................ 157 3.20 ANSI 64/59N – Overvoltage ground relay ................................................................... 158 3.20.1 ANSI SEF - 100% Stator-Earthfault-Protection ........................................................... 159 3.21 ANSI 66 – Start Inhibit for Motors ................................................................................ 168 3.22 ANSI 67 – AC Directional Overcurrent Relay .............................................................. 169 3.23 ANSI 67GS/GD – AC directional ground overcurrent relay .......................................... 173 3.24 ANSI 78 – Vector surge / dF/dt / dP/dt supervision relay ............................................ 176 3.25 ANSI 78 S Out-of-step tripping .................................................................................... 178 3.26 ANSI 79 – AC reclosing relay ...................................................................................... 181 3.27 ANSI 81 – Frequency relay ......................................................................................... 184 3.28 ANSI 81 B – BUS frequency relay ............................................................................... 187 3.29 ANSI 86 – Lockout relay ............................................................................................. 189 3.30 ANSI 87 – Differential protection relay ........................................................................ 190 3.31 ANSI 87LD – Line Differential Protection .................................................................... 194 3.32 ANSI 87 N – Restrict earth fault relay .......................................................................... 198 3.33 ANSI 94 – Supervision relay ....................................................................................... 201 3.34 ANSI 95 i – Inrush blocking relay ................................................................................ 205 3.35 ANSI FF – Fuse failure (voltages) ............................................................................... 207 3.36 Auxiliary limits ............................................................................................................. 209 3.37 ANSI CW Contact wear measurement ....................................................................... 211 3.38 ANSI FL Fault Locator................................................................................................ 215

4 Alarm controller settings .......................................................................................... 217

5 Special parameters ................................................................................................... 221

6 Maintenance, Servicing and Retesting .................................................................... 223

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Table of table

Table 2-1 Nominal settings selectors ..................................................................................... 30 Table 2-2 Available protocols ................................................................................................. 32 Table 2-3 Application of the second CANBUS-port ................................................................ 34 Table 2-4 Measuring types for analogous Inputs .................................................................... 37 Table 2-5 Event numbers for the current inputs ..................................................................... 38 Table 2-6 Connectors for temperature measuring inputs ........................................................ 38 Table 2-7 Event numbers for the temperature measuring inputs ............................................ 40 Table 2-8 Function inputs ....................................................................................................... 42 Table 2-9 Selection possibilities of analogous output function parameters ............................. 45 Table 2-10 Terminals of analogous outputs ............................................................................. 47 Table 2-11 Binary outputs ........................................................................................................ 48 Table 2-12 Parameters of function outputs .............................................................................. 52 Table 2-13 Net selectors .......................................................................................................... 56 Table 2-14 Automatic/Manual mode functions ......................................................................... 57 Table 2-15 Priority selectors .................................................................................................... 58 Table 3-1 Vector group matching ......................................................................................... 191 Table 3-2 LD copper connection .......................................................................................... 195 Table 3-3 Combinations of enabled limits............................................................................. 208 Table 5-1 Special parameters .............................................................................................. 221 Table 6-1 Life-limited components ....................................................................................... 223

Service Manual


Table of figure

Figure 1-1 Menu navigation – part 1 ....................................................................................... 11 Figure 1-2 Menu navigation – part 2 ....................................................................................... 12 Figure 1-3 Menu navigation – part 3 ....................................................................................... 13 Figure 1-4 Menu navigation – part 4 ....................................................................................... 14 Figure 1-5 Menu navigation – part 5 ....................................................................................... 15 Figure 2-1 System parameter groups ...................................................................................... 16 Figure 2-2 Codes .................................................................................................................... 17 Figure 2-3 General Parameter-1 ............................................................................................. 18 Figure 2-4 General Parameter-2 ............................................................................................. 18 Figure 2-5 General Parameter-3 ............................................................................................. 19 Figure 2-6 General Parameter-4 ............................................................................................. 19 Figure 2-7 General Parameter-5 ............................................................................................. 20 Figure 2-8 General Parameter-6 ............................................................................................. 20 Figure 2-9 General Parameter-7 ............................................................................................. 21 Figure 2-10 Nominal Ratio Values-1 ......................................................................................... 26 Figure 2-11 Nominal Ratio Values-2 ......................................................................................... 26 Figure 2-12 Nominal alue-3 ...................................................................................................... 27 Figure 2-13 Nominal Ratio Values-4 ......................................................................................... 28 Figure 2-14 Communication parameters-1 ................................................................................ 31 Figure 2-15 Communication parameters-2 ................................................................................ 31 Figure 2-16 Communication parameters-3 ................................................................................ 32 Figure 2-17 Analog Input “01” ................................................................................................... 36 Figure 2-18 Analog Input “05” ................................................................................................... 39 Figure 2-19 Binary Inputs-1 ...................................................................................................... 41 Figure 2-20 Structure and voltage level of the wire fault alarm .................................................. 43 Figure 2-21 Analogous Outputs-1 ............................................................................................. 44 Figure 2-22 Analogous Outputs-2 ............................................................................................. 44 Figure 2-23 Shunt #1 ................................................................................................................ 48 Figure 2-24 Shunt #2 ................................................................................................................ 49 Figure 2-25 Failure lock out ...................................................................................................... 50 Figure 2-26 Synchron ON ......................................................................................................... 51 Figure 2-27 Function outputs .................................................................................................... 52 Figure 2-28 Event builder .......................................................................................................... 53 Figure 2-29 Power management (main menu) .......................................................................... 54 Figure 2-30 General settings for power management-1 ............................................................ 55 Figure 2-31 General settings for power management-2 ............................................................ 55 Figure 2-32 Nominal power reduction ....................................................................................... 59 Figure 2-33 Power Management System for max. 14 Generators in one line and ring net

(Automatic net selection: “ON”) .............................................................................. 61 Figure 2-34 Power mamagement-1........................................................................................... 62 Figure 2-35 Power mamagement-2........................................................................................... 62 Figure 2-36 Power mamagement-3........................................................................................... 63 Figure 2-37 Load sharing-1 ....................................................................................................... 66 Figure 2-38 Load sharing-2 ....................................................................................................... 66 Figure 2-39 Frequency controller .............................................................................................. 71 Figure 2-40 Frequency control area .......................................................................................... 74 Figure 2-41 Voltage regulator ................................................................................................... 75 Figure 2-42 Voltage regulator area ........................................................................................... 77 Figure 2-43 Power factor controller ........................................................................................... 78 Figure 2-44 Big consumer request (BCR)-1 .............................................................................. 80 Figure 2-45 Big consumer request (BCR)-2 .............................................................................. 80 Figure 2-46 Big consumer request (BCR)-3 .............................................................................. 81 Figure 2-47 Blackout ................................................................................................................. 83 Figure 2-48 Blackout logic ........................................................................................................ 86 Figure 2-49 Engine control ........................................................................................................ 87

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 2-50 Alarm blocking logic ............................................................................................... 89 Figure 2-51 Starting phase ....................................................................................................... 90 Figure 2-52 Fuel oil valve logic ................................................................................................. 91 Figure 2-53 Stopping phase ...................................................................................................... 93 Figure 2-54 Starting procedure of the diesel generator ............................................................. 96 Figure 2-55 Stopping procedure of the diesel generator ........................................................... 97 Figure 2-56 Preferential trip limits ............................................................................................. 98 Figure 2-57 Additional limits .................................................................................................... 101 Figure 3-1 ANSI-DEVICE LIST-1 .......................................................................................... 104 Figure 3-2 ANSI-DEVICE LIST-2 .......................................................................................... 104 Figure 3-3 ANSI-DEVICE LIST-3 .......................................................................................... 105 Figure 3-4 ANSI 15-1 ............................................................................................................ 106 Figure 3-5 ANSI 15-2 ............................................................................................................ 106 Figure 3-6 ANSI 15-3 ............................................................................................................ 107 Figure 3-7 ANSI 15 – Speed regulation ................................................................................ 110 Figure 3-8 ANSI 15 – Voltage regulation ............................................................................... 111 Figure 3-9 ANSI 24 ............................................................................................................... 112 Figure 3-10 ANSI 25/A-1 ......................................................................................................... 113 Figure 3-11 ANSI 25/A-2 ......................................................................................................... 114 Figure 3-12 ANSI 25/A-3 ......................................................................................................... 114 Figure 3-13 ANSI 25/A-4 ......................................................................................................... 115 Figure 3-14 ANSI 25/A-5 ......................................................................................................... 115 Figure 3-15 ANSI 25/A-6 ......................................................................................................... 116 Figure 3-16 ANSI 25/A-7 ......................................................................................................... 119 Figure 3-17 ANSI 25 /A-8 ........................................................................................................ 120 Figure 3-18 ANSI 25 /A-9 ........................................................................................................ 120 Figure 3-19 ANSI 27 ............................................................................................................... 121 Figure 3-20 Logic diagram for the undervoltage protection ..................................................... 122 Figure 3-21 ANSI 27 B ............................................................................................................ 123 Figure 3-22 ANSI 32 ............................................................................................................... 124 Figure 3-23 ANSI 37 ............................................................................................................... 126 Figure 3-24 ANSI 40 Q-1 ........................................................................................................ 127 Figure 3-25 ANSI 40 Q-2 trip area for loss of field supervision ................................................ 128 Figure 3-26 ANSI 46 ............................................................................................................... 130 Figure 3-27 Diagram of the voltage restrain calculation curve ................................................. 132 Figure 3-28 heating and cooling curve .................................................................................... 133 Figure 3-29 Logic diagram for the reverse phase/balance protection ...................................... 134 Figure 3-30 ANSI 47 ............................................................................................................... 135 Figure 3-31 ANSI 49-1 ............................................................................................................ 136 Figure 3-32 ANSI 49-2 ............................................................................................................ 139 Figure 3-33 ANSI 49-3 ............................................................................................................ 139 Figure 3-34 Current/time curve of thermal overload II ............................................................. 140 Figure 3-35 ANSI 49-4 ............................................................................................................ 141 Figure 3-36 ANSI 50BF........................................................................................................... 142 Figure 3-37 Logic connection of failure relay ........................................................................... 142 Figure 3-38 ANSI 50 ............................................................................................................... 143 Figure 3-39 Logic diagram for the instantaneous overcurrent protection ................................. 144 Figure 3-40 ANSI 50G/N ......................................................................................................... 145 Figure 3-41 Logic diagram for ANSI 50G/N ............................................................................. 146 Figure 3-42 ANSI 51 ............................................................................................................... 147 Figure 3-43 Pickup value calculation curve of the voltage restrain function ............................. 149 Figure 3-44 Logic diagram for the AC time overcurrent protection .......................................... 150 Figure 3-45 ANSI 51G/N ......................................................................................................... 151 Figure 3-46 ANSI 51 LR .......................................................................................................... 153 Figure 3-47 Inverse time characteristic during starting phase. The extremely inverse curve for

trip time will be defined by parameters [1541] and [1542] ..................................... 154

Service Manual


Figure 3-48 Definite time characteristic during running state of the motor. The time characteristic will be defined by parameters [1543] and [1544] .................................................. 154

Figure 3-49 ANSI 59 ............................................................................................................... 155 Figure 3-50 Logic diagram for the overvoltage protection ....................................................... 156 Figure 3-51 ANSI 59 B ............................................................................................................ 157 Figure 3-52 ANSI 64 ............................................................................................................... 158 Figure 3-53 ANSI SEF ............................................................................................................ 163 Figure 3-54 Logic diagram for 100% Stator Earth Fault protection (ANSI SEF) ...................... 167 Figure 3-55 ANSI 66 ............................................................................................................... 168 Figure 3-56 Start inhibit for motors – overview ........................................................................ 168 Figure 3-57 ANSI 67 ............................................................................................................... 169 Figure 3-58 Operation sector when parameter [1806] is set to “reverse” ................................. 170 Figure 3-59 Operation sector when parameter [1806] is set to “forward” ................................. 171 Figure 3-60 Operational sector when parameter [1806] is set to “angle” and Parameter [1807] is

set to -45° ............................................................................................................ 171 Figure 3-61 Criteria for ANSI 67 trip ........................................................................................ 171 Figure 3-62 Logic diagram for the AC directional overcurrent protection ................................. 172 Figure 3-63 ANSI 67GS/GD .................................................................................................... 173 Figure 3-64 Operation characteristic when the phase angle φp = +90° .................................... 174 Figure 3-65 Operation characteristic when the phase angle φp = 0° ........................................ 175 Figure 3-66 ANSI 78 ............................................................................................................... 176 Figure 3-67 ANSI 78 S ............................................................................................................ 178 Figure 3-68 Example for ANSI 78 S out-of-step tripping .......................................................... 179 Figure 3-69 ANSI 79 ............................................................................................................... 181 Figure 3-70 Timing diagram for a second successful reclosure ............................................... 183 Figure 3-71 Timing diagram for two unsuccessful reclosing shots ......................................... 183 Figure 3-72 ANSI 81 ............................................................................................................... 184 Figure 3-73 Logicdiagram for the frequency protection ........................................................... 186 Figure 3-74 ANSI 81 B-1 ......................................................................................................... 187 Figure 3-75 ANSI 81 B-2 ......................................................................................................... 187 Figure 3-76 ANSI 86 ............................................................................................................... 189 Figure 3-77 Logic diagram for the lockout relay function ......................................................... 189 Figure 3-78 ANSI 87 ............................................................................................................... 190 Figure 3-79 Formula and characteristic of the bias factor ........................................................ 192 Figure 3-80 CT-connection for ANSI 87 .................................................................................. 193 Figure 3-81 Line Differential Protection – fibre optic connection .............................................. 194 Figure 3-82 Line Differential Protection – copper pilot wiring .................................................. 195 Figure 3-83 ANSI 87 N............................................................................................................ 198 Figure 3-84 Restricted earth fault for Transformer application................................................. 199 Figure 3-85 Restricted earth fault for Generator/Motor application .......................................... 200 Figure 3-86 ANSI 94 ............................................................................................................... 201 Figure 3-87 DC application – Working principle to connect the SYMAP® to DC breaker coils . 202 Figure 3-88 DC-application – Connection of SYMAP®for DC breaker coil supervision ............ 203 Figure 3-89 AC-Application – Connection of SYMAP®for AC breaker coil supervision ............ 203 Figure 3-90 Logic diagram for the shunt trip supervision ......................................................... 204 Figure 3-91 Logic diagram for the aux. power supervision ...................................................... 204 Figure 3-92 ANSI 95 i ............................................................................................................. 206 Figure 3-93 ANSI FF ............................................................................................................... 207 Figure 3-94 Auxiliary limits-1 ................................................................................................... 209 Figure 3-95 Auxiliary limits-2 ................................................................................................... 209 Figure 3-96 Contact wear measurement-1 .............................................................................. 211 Figure 3-97 Contact wear measurement-2 .............................................................................. 211 Figure 3-98 Contact wear measurement-3 .............................................................................. 212 Figure 3-99 Contact wear measurement-4 .............................................................................. 212 Figure 3-100 Contact wear measurement-5 .......................................................................... 212 Figure 3-101 ANSI FL Fault Locator ..................................................................................... 215 Figure 4-1 Alarm parameter mask......................................................................................... 217

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 4-2 Alarm channel logic ............................................................................................. 218

Service Manual


1 Parameter settings introduction

1.1 Change of settings

All settings can be easily set or changed directly with the front panel keys of SYMAP® without any additional programming device or laptop computer. A menu tree structure offers easy access to the functions. To change a setting or to set new settings, first select the parameter with the Up-key and Down-key and then press the Enter-key. The requested digit can be selected by using the Left-key and Right-key. The digit can be changed by pressing the Up-key and Down-key. After finishing the change of values (numbers) or text declaration, such as “ON” or “OFF”, press the Enter-key. The next parameter may now be selected by pressing the Up-key and the Down key.

1.2 Event system introduction

The event system of the device gives the user the possibility to realize his own applications. With events all functions of the device can be activated or deactivated. An event is an internal logical representation of a device process. The event system offers sources and sinks of events. The event sources have fixed unique event numbers. These event numbers became active (logically “True”) if the condition related to this event is fulfilled (e.g. a limit is reached), otherwise inactive (logically “False”). The event sinks are linked to fixed processes or fixed functions and can be programmed by the user. The user can build a link between the source and the sink by setting an event source number to an event sink number. The sink (function) became active if the related source became also active.

NOTE: Some modules are sinks and sources at the same time, e.g. all binary outputs are sinks and will be activated by source events. But every binary output produces himself again source events when he becomes active. The same is valid for alarms and all event builder elements. The source events can be combined over logic modules (event builder) which produce new source events.

Examples:

The ANSI 25 /A Synchronizing unit 1 should be activated by a binary input (Function 20). The binary input is an event source and the Sync. unit is an event sink. The event number related to the input is [0521]. This number must be set on parameter [1000] (SYNC. UNIT 1 active by: [0521]) by the user. Then Function 20 activates the Sync. unit 1.

The ANSI 50 overcurrent relay should open a circuit breaker over a binary output (Shunt #1). ANSI 50 is an event source and the binary output an event sink (respectively a source). One event number related to ANSI 50 is [1402] (1.limit reached and delay passed). This number must be set on Shunt #1 (e.g. 01: [1402]). Then a measured current value will open a circuit breaker.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1.3 Graphical Quick User Guide – e.g. SYMAP®-Y

(1)

(2)

MET

ERS

ALA

RM

SP

RO

CES

S

F1

MET

ERS

F1

MET

ERS

ENTE

RM

ENU

ENTE

RM

ENU

F2

ALA

RM

S

MET

ERS

LIST

DIS

PLA

Y

ALA

RM

/EV

ENT

LIST

ENTE

RM

ENU

PR

OC

ESS

LIST

ENTE

RM

ENU

MO

DB

US

Pro

fib

us

DP

MO

DB

US

(RS4

22

)

F3

PR

OC

ESS

EXIT

F4 →

EXIT

F4 →

EXIT

F4 →

ALA

RM

SP

RO

CES

SM

ETER

SP

RO

CES

SM

ETER

SA

LAR

MS

(A)

(B)

(C)

F1

MET

ERS

(B)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(C)

F1

MET

ERS

(A)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(C)

F1

MET

ERS

(A)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(B)

ENTE

RM

ENU

ENTE

RM

ENU

ENTE

RM

ENU

Ove

rvie

wC

urr

ent

met

ers

Vo

ltag

e m

eter

sP

ow

er m

eter

sC

ou

nte

rG

rou

nd

val

ues

Har

mo

nic

wav

esFr

equ

ency

met

ers

An

alo

g in

pu

tsD

isp

lay

sett

ing

Act

ive

alar

ms

Ala

rm g

rou

ps

Act

ive

even

tsEv

ent

his

tory

Det

aile

d h

isto

ryIn

terl

ock

pag

eSy

stem

fail

pag

e

Syn

chro

niz

erB

reak

er c

ou

nte

r

SYN

CH

RO

NIS

ING

PA

GE

BR

EAK

ER C

OU

NTE

R

ALA

RM

PA

GE

GR

OU

PS

EVEN

TS

EVEN

T H

ISTO

RY

DET

AIL

ED P

RO

T. H

ISTO

RY

INTE

RLO

CK

PA

GE

SYTE

MFA

IL P

AG

E

MET

ERS

OV

ERV

IEW

CU

RR

ENT

MET

ERS

VO

LTA

GE

MET

ERS

PO

WER

MET

ERS

CO

UN

TER

GR

OU

ND

VA

LUES

HA

RM

ON

IC W

AV

ES

FREQ

UEN

CY

MET

ER

AN

ALO

G IN

PU

TS

DIS

PLA

Y SE

TTIN

G

Ove

rvie

wA

ctiv

e A

larm

sSy

nch

ron

ize

r

F4 →

Figure 1-1 Menu navigation – part 1

Service Manual


(2)

(3)

CO

NTR

OL

ENTE

R P

ASS

WO

RD

!**

**

ENTE

RM

ENU

SYST

EM

SYST

EM C

ON

TRO

L

F1

MET

ERS

BR

EAK

ER -

----

----

----

---

mo

de

:

„LO

CA

L“p

roce

ss

: „A

UTO

“st

ate

: „U

NLO

CK

ED.“

recl

ose

r :

„O

FF“

SYST

EM -

----

----

----

----

-b

eep

er

: „

OFF

“h

eate

r

: „

ON

“LO

CK

OU

T --

----

----

----

--st

ate

: „

CLO

SED

“R

eset

: -

---

ENTE

RM

ENU

Be

trie

b

ENTE

RM

ENU

EXIT

F4 →

VER

SIO

N

: „

no

ne“

ENTE

RM

ENU

VER

SIO

N

ENTE

RM

ENU

EXIT

AP

PLI

C:

AN

WEN

DU

NG

EN

F2

ALA

RM

S

VER

SIO

N

: „

no

ne“

VER

SIO

N„6

"SC

HA

LTER

---

----

----

----

-B

etri

eb

: „

LOC

AL“

Pro

zess

:

„A

UTO

“Zu

stan

d

: „E

NTR

IEG

.“R

eclo

ser

: „

AU

S“SY

STEM

---

----

----

----

----

Pie

per

: „A

US“

Hei

zer

: „EI

N“

LOC

KO

UT

----

----

----

----

Zust

and

:

„ZU

“Lö

sch

en

: --

--

Be

trie

bSC

HA

LTER

---

----

----

----

-B

etri

eb

: „

LOC

AL“

Pro

zess

:

„A

UTO

“Zu

stan

d

: „E

NTR

IEG

.“R

eclo

ser

: „

AU

S“SY

STEM

---

----

----

----

----

Pie

per

: „A

US“

Hei

zer

: „EI

N“

LOC

KO

UT

----

----

----

----

Zust

and

:

„ZU

“Lö

sch

en

: --

--

Be

trie

bSC

HA

LTER

---

----

----

----

-B

etri

eb

: „

LOC

AL“

Pro

zess

:

„A

UTO

“Zu

stan

d

: „E

NTR

IEG

.“R

eclo

ser

: „

AU

S“SY

STEM

---

----

----

----

----

Pie

per

: „A

US“

Hei

zer

: „EI

N“

LOC

KO

UT

----

----

----

----

Zust

and

:

„ZU

“Lö

sch

en

: --

--

Be

trie

b„R

EMO

TE“

EXIT

(1)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(1)

F4 →


Service Manual

SYMAP®


SETT

ING

VIE

W

AN

SI D

EVIC

E LI

ST

F1

MET

ERS

15

Mat

chin

g d

evic

e (m

oto

rpo

ti)

24

Ove

rexc

itat

ion

rel

ay2

5/A

Sy

nch

ron

izin

g re

lay

… … … 95

i

Inru

sh b

lock

ing

rela

y

FF

Fu

se F

ailu

re (

volt

ages

)

AL

A

uxi

liary

lim

its

C

W C

on

tact

wea

r m

easu

rem

ent

F

L

Fau

lt L

oca

tor

ENTE

RM

ENU

Mat

chin

g d

evi

ce (

mo

torp

oti

)

F3

PR

OC

ESS

MA

INP

AG

E

F4 →

REL

AY

SYST

EMA

LAR

MS

(4)

EXIT

BA

CK

F3

PR

OC

ESS

EXIT

F4 →

(1)

(1)

(3)

AN

SI D

EVIC

E LI

ST 00

C

od

es0

1

Gen

eral

par

amet

rers

02

N

om

inal

rat

io v

alu

es0

3

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

04

A

nal

ogo

us

inp

uts

05

B

inar

y in

pu

ts0

6

An

alo

gou

s o

utp

uts

07

B

inar

y o

utp

uts

08

Ev

ent

bu

ilder

09

P

ow

erm

anag

emen

t

ENTE

RM

ENU

00

Co

de

s

… Parameter ...

BA

CK

F3

PR

OC

ESS

EXIT

F4 →

****

Seri

al n

um

be

r

CU

:M

U:

RU

:

Soft

war

e v

ers

.

… Parameter ... … Parameters ...

… Parameter ... … Parameter ... … Parameters ...

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

– S

ELEC

T:

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

EV

ENT

– S

elec

t

:

„

01

"

- 1

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- 2

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- m

od

e

: N

O A

CK

-

tri

gger

:

15

05

-

blo

ck b

y :

0

- d

elay

:

0.0

sec

-

1. g

rou

p :

8

3

- 1

. gro

up

: n

on

e

- p

rio

rity

: n

on

e

- o

pti

on

:

no

ne

-

bee

per

: O

FF

Sele

ct

ALA

RM

:TR

IP:

red

:am

ber

:gr

een

:

LED

CO

NTR

OL

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

EV

ENT

– S

elec

t

:

„

01

"

- 1

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- 2

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- m

od

e

: N

O A

CK

-

tri

gger

:

15

05

-

blo

ck b

y :

0

- d

elay

:

0.0

sec

-

1. g

rou

p :

8

3

- 1

. gro

up

: n

on

e

- p

rio

rity

: n

on

e

- o

pti

on

:

no

ne

-

bee

per

: O

FF

Sele

ct

ALA

RM

:TR

IP:

red

:am

ber

:gr

een

:

LED

CO

NTR

OL

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

EV

ENT

– S

elec

t

:

„

01

"

- 1

. lin

e: (

„ed

itab

le t

ext“

)

- 2

. lin

e: (

„ed

itab

le t

ext“

)

- m

od

e

: N

O A

CK

-

tri

gger

:

15

05

-

blo

ck b

y :

0

- d

elay

:

0.0

sec

-

1. g

rou

p :

8

3

- 1

. gro

up

: n

on

e

- p

rio

rity

: n

on

e

- o

pti

on

:

no

ne

-

bee

per

: O

FF

Sele

ct

ALA

RM

:TR

IP:

red

:am

ber

:gr

een

:

LED

CO

NTR

OL

EXIT

F4 →

(1)

ALA

RM

SEX

ITSY

STEM

ALA

RM

SEX

ITR

ELA

Y

F4 →

F4 →

SYST

EMEX

ITR

ELA

Y

F4 →

(D)

(E)

(F)

F1

MET

ERS

(E)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(F)

F1

MET

ERS

(D)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(F)

F1

MET

ERS

(D)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(E)

F3

PR

OC

ESS

F2

ALA

RM

SF

1

MET

ERS

F4 →


Service Manual


Par

amet

rier

en

ÄN

DER

N

15

Mat

chin

g d

evic

e (m

oto

rpo

ti)

24

Ove

rexc

itat

ion

rel

ay2

5/A

Sy

nch

ron

izin

g re

lay

… … … 95

i

Inru

sh b

lock

ing

rela

y

FF

Fu

se F

ailu

re (

volt

ages

)

AL

A

uxi

liary

lim

its

C

W C

on

tact

wea

r m

easu

rem

ent

F

L

Fau

lt L

oca

tor

ENTE

RM

ENU

Mat

chin

g d

evi

ce (

mo

torp

oti

)

SCH

UTZ

F1

MET

ERS

SYST

EM

F2

ALA

RM

S

ALA

RM

E

(5)

F3

PR

OC

ESS

END

E

ZUR

üC

K

F3

PR

OC

ESS

END

E

F4 →

(1)

(4)

SYST

EM P

AR

AM

ETER 00

C

od

es0

1

Gen

eral

par

amet

rers

02

N

om

inal

rat

io v

alu

es0

3

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

04

A

nal

ogo

us

inp

uts

05

B

inar

y in

pu

ts0

6

An

alo

gou

s o

utp

uts

07

B

inar

y o

utp

uts

08

Ev

ent

bu

ilder

09

P

ow

erm

anag

emen

t

ENTE

RM

ENU

00

Co

de

s

… Parameter ...

ZUR

üC

K

F3

PR

OC

ESS

END

E

F4 →

****

Seri

al n

um

be

r

CU

:M

U:

RU

:

Soft

war

e v

ers

.

… Parameter ... … Parameter ...

… Parameter ... … Parameter ... … Parameter ...

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

– S

ELEC

T:

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

EV

ENT

– S

elec

t

:

„

01

"

- 1

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- 2

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- m

od

e

: N

O A

CK

-

tri

gger

:

15

05

-

blo

ck b

y :

0

- d

elay

:

0.0

sec

-

1. g

rou

p :

8

3

- 1

. gro

up

: n

on

e

- p

rio

rity

: n

on

e

- o

pti

on

:

no

ne

-

bee

per

: O

FF

Sele

ct

ALA

RM

:TR

IP:

red

:am

ber

:gr

een

:

LED

CO

NTR

OL

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

EV

ENT

– S

elec

t

:

„

01

"

- 1

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- 2

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- m

od

e

: N

O A

CK

-

tri

gger

:

15

05

-

blo

ck b

y :

0

- d

elay

:

0.0

sec

-

1. g

rou

p :

8

3

- 1

. gro

up

: n

on

e

- p

rio

rity

: n

on

e

- o

pti

on

:

no

ne

-

bee

per

: O

FF

Sele

ct

ALA

RM

:TR

IP:

red

:am

ber

:gr

een

:

LED

CO

NTR

OL

ALA

RM

CH

AN

NEL

EV

ENT

– S

elec

t

:

„

01

"

- 1

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- 2

. lin

e: (

„ed

itie

rbar

er T

ext“

)

- m

od

e

: N

O A

CK

-

tri

gger

:

15

05

-

blo

ck b

y :

0

- d

elay

:

0.0

sec

-

1. g

rou

p :

8

3

- 1

. gro

up

: n

on

e

- p

rio

rity

: n

on

e

- o

pti

on

:

no

ne

-

bee

per

: O

FF

Sele

ct

ALA

RM

:TR

IP:

red

:am

ber

:gr

een

:

LED

CO

NTR

OL

END

E

F4 →

(1)

PA

SSW

OR

TEIN

GA

BE

****

ENTE

RM

ENU

F1

MET

ERS

ENTE

RM

ENU

Par

amet

rier

en

ENTE

RM

ENU

ENTE

RM

ENU

… Parameter ... … Parameter ... … Parameter ...

Par

amet

rier

en

ENTE

RM

ENU

ENTE

RM

ENU

AN

SI D

EVIC

E LI

ST

ALA

RM

EEN

DE

SYST

EM

F4 →

ALA

RM

EEN

DE

SCH

UTZ

F4 →

SYST

EMEN

DE

SCH

UTZ

F4 →

(G)

(H)

(I)

F1

MET

ERS

(H)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(I)

F1

MET

ERS

(G)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(I)

F1

MET

ERS

(G)

F2

ALA

RM

S

(H)

ENTE

RM

ENU

F4 →


Service Manual

SYMAP®


Syst

emst

atu

sTe

stb

ox

(I/O

)SS

C-T

ran

sfer

stat

us

SSC

-MU

/RU

-Dat

aC

AN

-Tra

nsf

erst

atu

sSe

rial

ch

ann

elTr

ansp

on

der

EEP

RO

M s

tatu

sEX

T.b

oar

d (

AD

Cs)

Soft

war

eR

elai

s d

rive

rQ

S-O

verv

iew

ENTE

RM

ENU

Syst

em

stat

us

F1

MET

ERS

CA

LIB

-

F2

ALA

RM

S

TEST

MO

DE

NV

R-R

EST

(1)

(5)

CA

LIB

RA

TIO

N P

AR

AM

ETER

00

09

. Dev

ice

seri

al n

um

ber

:

0

00

10

. U1

gen

C

AL.

-

X1

/17

:

1

00

%0

01

1. U

2ge

n

CA

L.

-X

1/1

9 :

10

0 %

00

12

. U3

gen

C

AL.

-

X1

/21

:

1

00

%… … … 0

09

2.

– P

T 1

00

:

2.0

sec

ENTE

RM

ENU

… Parameter ...

EXIT

F4 →

… Parameter ... … Parameters ...

TEST

MO

DE

EXIT

F4 →

Cal

ibra

te

ENTE

RM

ENU

… Parameter ... … Parameter ... … Parameters ...

Test

/Par

amet

er s

etti

ng

ENTE

RM

ENU

SER

VIC

E LI

ST

F3

PR

OC

ESS

(DA

TA)

SYST

EM S

TATU

S

(DA

TA)

Test

bo

x (I

/O)

(DA

TA)

SSC

-Tra

nsf

erst

atu

s

(DA

TA)

SSC

-MU

/RU

-Dat

a

(DA

TA)

CA

N-T

ran

sfer

stat

us

(DA

TA)

Seri

al c

han

nel

(DA

TA)

Tran

spo

nd

er

(DA

TA)

EEP

RO

M s

tatu

s

(DA

TA)

EXT.

bo

ard

s (A

DC

s)

(DA

TA)

Soft

war

e

(DA

TA)

Rel

ais

dri

ver

(DA

TA)

QS-

Ove

rvie

w

ENTE

RM

ENU

EXIT

F4 →

SER

VIC

E

EXIT

(1)

00

09

. De

vice

se

rial

nu

mb

er

:

0

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

-

:

Sh

un

t#1

C

ycle

s

:

10

00

O

n-t

ime

:

0.1

0 s

ec

Off

-tim

e

:

0

.10

sec

Act

ion

: OFF

O

N C

YCLE

----

----

----

----

----

-- Q

S --

----

----

---

KEY

BO

AR

D

:

O

FFLE

D C

YCLE

:

OFF

BEE

PER

:

OFF

I/O

-tes

t

:

OFF

Wat

chd

og

:

OFF

BIN

. OU

TPU

T

ENTE

RM

ENU

Cal

ibra

tio

n t

ole

ran

ce:

0,1

0 %

--Se

lect

----

- --

----

Sou

rce-

----

----

---S

tatu

s—U

gen

/Ige

n2

30

.94

V /

1 A

I>

>

10

AU

bu

s 2

30

.94

V

Ub

us

2

n

on

eId

iff

no

ne

Ugn

d1

no

ne

/ n

on

eIg

nd

1

1A

/ 5

AU

aux

60

Vd

cSh

un

t ½

60

Vd

c /6

0 V

dc

ENTE

RM

ENU

-------------------------

-------------------------

ENTE

RM

ENU

BA

CK

F3

PR

OC

ESS

EXIT

(1)

CA

L.M

OD

ED

EFA

ULT

NO

MIN

AL

F2

ALA

RM

SF

1

MET

ERS

EXIT

F4 →

F3

PR

OC

ESS

(H\0

2)

F3

PR

OC

ESS

F4 →

F4 →

ENTE

RM

ENU

Acc

ess

on

ly b

y St

uck

e E

lect

ron

ic G

mb

H !


Service Manual


2 System settings

Figure 2-1 shows the different system parameter groups.

Figure 2-1 System parameter groups

SYSTEM PARAMETER

RELAY ALARMS EXIT

00 Codes

01 General parameter

02 Nominal ratio values

03 Communication

04 Analogous inputs

05 Binary inputs

06 Analogous outputs

07 Binary outputs

08 Event builder

09 Power management

00 Codes

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.1 Codes

The system codes are used to define access levels for the user (see figure 2-2).

Figure 2-2 Codes

Parameter description:

0001. Breaker/system control : Only for breaker or system control, not for change of settings

0002. Settings w/o ev.builder : For breaker or system control and for change of settings, but without codes and event builder

0003. Master password : Access without restrictions

NOTE: The default codes have all the value 1111.

The passwords can be disabled by setting all 3 passwords (parameters [0001] to [0003]) to zero (also for Types with Transponder). In this case the device is accessible only with a transponder card or the Parameter Tool, and the access to this Codes setting page of the device is blocked.

Back EXIT

1111

0002. Settings w/o ev.builder : 1111

0003. Master password : 1111

0001. Breaker/system control :

CODES Setting ranges

0-9999

0-9999

0-9999

Service Manual


2.2 General Parameter

The general parameters of SYMAP® contains the setting of the on-board real time clock, the selection of the graphic mimic for the LC-Display and the definition of the corresponding circuit- breaker feedback signals (see figures 2-3 to 2-9).

Figure 2-3 General Parameter-1


BACK EXIT

16

0101. - minutes : 47

0102. DATE setting - year : 2003

0103. - month : 10

0104. - day : 21

0105. - format : YY.MM.DD

0106. LANGUAGE - select : ENGLISH

0107. GRAPHIC TYPE - select : 1B ES.F-0

0108. Change mian page : OFF

0109. Freq. average builder : 2.5 sec

0110. Power average builder : 3.5 sec

0111. Meters average builder : 10.0 sec

0112. Check control access : ON

0100. TIME setting - hours :

GENERAL PARAMETER Setting range:

0-24

0-60

2002-2040

0-12

0-31

D.M.Y, Y.M.D, M.D.Y

ENGLISH/GERMAN/FRENCH/RUSSIAN/…

(see Appendix A3)

OFF/Layout 1/Layout 2

0.0- 10.0 sec

0.0- 10.0 sec

0.0-999.9 sec

OFF/ON

BACK EXIT

500

0114. -OFF feedback : 0

0115. – ON->OFF control event

0116. – OFF->ON control event

0117. – IN feedback : 0

0118. - OUT feedback : 0

0119. – OUT->IN control event

0120. – IN->OUT control event

0121. - EARTH ON feedback : 0

0122. - EARTH OFF feedback : 0

0123. - OFF->EARTH ctrl.event

0124. - EARTH->OFF ctrl.event

0125. - ctrl. Time (fail ev.) : 15.0 sec

0113. BREAKER 1 – ON feedback :


0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0,0-9999,9 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®




BACK EXIT

502




0130. IN feedback : 0

0131. OUT feedback : 0

0132. OUT->IN control event

0133. IN->OUT control event

0134. EARTH ON feedback : 504

0135. EARTH OFF feedback : 0

0136. EARTH->OFF crtl. Event

0137. OFF->EARTH crtl. Event

0138. crtl. time (fail ev.) : 15.0 sec

0126. BREAKER 2 -ON feedback :


0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0,0-999,9 sec

BACK EXIT

0




0143. IN feedback : 0

0144. OUT feedback : 0

0145. OUT->IN control event

0146. IN->OUT control event

0147. EARTH ON feedback : 0

0148. EARTH OFF feedback : 0

0149. EARTH->OFF crtl. Event

0150. OFF->EARTH crtl. Event

0151. crtl. time (fail ev.) : 15.0 sec

0139. BREAKER 3 -ON feedback :


0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

Event display only

Event display only

0,0-999,9 sec

Service Manual




BACK EXIT

0h

0153. - cycle limit : 0h

0154. – Active power (fwd) P+ : 0

0155. - Active power (rev) P- : 0

0156. – React. power (cap) Q+ : 0

0156. – React. power (ind) Q- : 0

0158. – Breaker 1 ON cycles : 0

0159. - EARTH cycles : 0


0161. - EARTH cycles : 0


0163. – Breaker 1 ON max.cyc. : 10000

0152. COUNTER – Working hours :


0-999999 h

0-60000 h

0-4294967280

0-4294967280

0-4294967280

0-4294967280

0-65535

0-65535

0-65535

0-65535

0-65535

0-65535

BACK EXIT

10000

0165. - Braker 2 ON max.cyc : 10000

0166. - EARTH max.cyc : 10000

0167. - Braker 3 ON max.cyc : 10000

0168. – kWh-pulses (P+) : ON

0169. - kWh/pulse : 10

0170. - pulse duration: 0.05 sec

0171. CB CLOSED (Net) feedback : 0

0172. REMOTE – ACK : 526

0173. Switch op.mode(loc/rem) : 0

0174. (P-) – kWh/pulse : 0

0175. - pulse duration : 0.00 sec

0176. (Q+) – kvarh/pulse : 0

0177. - pulse duration : 0.00 sec

0178. (Q-) – kvarh/pulse : 0

0179. - pulse durattion : 0.00 sec

0164. - EARTH max.cyc :


0-65535

0-65535

0-65535

0-65535

ON/OFF

0-65535

0,01-655,34 sec

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

0-65535

0,01-655,34 sec

0-65535

0,01-655,34 sec

0-65535

0,01-655,34 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®




0100. Time setting - hours : Setting of hours of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

NOTE: If devices are connected over the CANBUS1 they will synchronize their RTCs automatically.

0101. - minutes : Setting of minutes of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0102. Date setting - year : Setting of year of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0103. - month : Setting of month of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0104. - day : Setting of day of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0105. - format : Selection of shown format of the date

0106. LANGUAGE - select : Actually available: ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, RUSSIAN, SERBIAN, SPANISH and TURKISH. The languages are valid for the user menu, not for the settings menu section (this section is always in English).

0107. GRAPHIC TYPE - select : Selection of the shown graphic (BUS and breaker arrangement). For details refer to the Appendix A3.

0108. Change main page : With this parameter different layouts (with bar graphs) for the main page can be selected.

0109. Freq. average builder : Real average builder for the gen. freq. with max. 10 sec period. The builder influences all processes related to the freq. (display, comm., analog outputs, PM…).

BACK EXIT

0 ev.

2481. Switch OFF LCD/LEDs by : 0 ev.

2482. Working hours limit 1 : 0 h

2483. Working hours limit 2 : 0 h

2480. Block ACK-key event :

GENERAL PARAMETER Seeting range:

0-9999 Event

0-9999 Event

0-65000 h

0-65000 h

Service Manual


0110. Power average builder : Real average builder for the sum active power with max. 10 sec period. The builder influences all processes related to the active power (display, power counter, PM…).

0111. Meters average builder : This parameter is valid both for all meter values displayed on all pages and on the 7-segment displays and for those into communication transferred measured values. This parameter does not affect the measured values for the protection. If the changing of a value is below the deadband limit (parameter [0074], see chapter 5) the average builder will plane the value (Exception: On the current meters page the column “average” is build always even if the value is higher than the deadband limit).

0112. Check control access :

“OFF”: free breaker control over the front panel

“ON”: password protected breaker control over the front panel

0113. BREAKER 1 -ON feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “ON” feedback

0114. -OFF feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “OFF” feedback

0115. - ON−>OFF control event : Control event of the ON −> OFF switching cycle of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0116. - OFF−>ON control event : Control event of the OFF −> ON switching cycle of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0117. - IN feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “IN” position feedback

0118. - OUT feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “OUT” position feedback

0119. - OUT−>IN control event : Control event of the OUT −> IN position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0120. - IN−>OUT control event : Control event of the IN −> OUT position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0121. - EARTH ON feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “EARTH ON” position feedback

0122. - EARTH OFF feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “EARTH OFF” position feedback

0123. - EARTH−>OFF ctrl. event : Control event of the EARTH −> OFF position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0124. - OFF->EARTH ctrl. event : Control event of the OFF −> EARTH position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0125. - ctrl. time (fail ev.) : Setting of supervision time (control time) of the maximum operation time of a switching cycle or position movement of breaker 1; if the breaker does not reach the desired position within this time event [0125] will become active (until ACK). Use this event to trigger an alarm for an error message.

0126. BREAKER 2 -ON feedback : to

0138. - ctrl. Time (fail ev.) : See description of Breaker 1 (events [0113] to [0125])

0139. BREAKER 3 -ON feedback : to

0151. - ctrl. Time (fail ev.) : See description of Breaker 1 (events [0113] to [0125])

0152. COUNTER - Working hours : Setting of the counter of working hours. The counter is active if a Gen. frequency is detected. The counter is also active if parameter [1930] is enabled and the CB is closed (see ANSI - CW Contact wear measurement).

0153. - cycle limit : The limit is enabled if P[0153] is greater zero. Event E[0153] will be activate for one impulse if the internal counter reaches the limit of P[0153]. Than the internal counter will be reset to zero and the counting starts again. The internal counter is stored nonvolatile.

0154. - Active power (fwd) P+ : Setting of the counter of active power (forward) Pw+ in kWh

0155. - Active power (rev) P- : Setting of the counter of active power (reverse) Pw- in kWh

0156. - React. Power (cap) Q+ : Setting of the counter of reactive power (capacitive) Pq+ in kvarh

0157. - React. Power (ind) Q- : Setting of the counter of reactive power (inductive) Pq- in kvarh

0158. - Breaker 1 ON cycles : Setting of the cycle counter of disconnecting switch no. 1

0159. - EARTH cycles : Setting of the cycle counter of the earth switch no. 1


0161. - EARTH cycles : Setting of the cycle counter of the earth switch no. 2


Service Manual


0163. - Breaker 1 ON max.cyc. : Setting of maximum cycles of disconnecting switch no. 1 before next inspection

0164. - EARTH max.cyc. : Setting of maximum cycles of earthing switch no. 1 before next inspection


0166. - EARTH max.cyc. : Setting of maximum cycles of earthing switch no. 2 before next inspection


0168. - kWh-pulses (P+) : Selection if the kWh-pulse function is switched “ON” or “OFF”

0169. - kWh/pulse : Setting of kWh per counter pulse

0170. - pulse duration : Setting of the pulse duration; use the event [0170] to drive an binary output.

0171. CB CLOSED (Net) feedback : This parameter is usable only for the PM (Device Type G). If this parameter is set and the setted event is active the device has the status “CB CLOSED” (independent of the selected graphic). The “CB” status depends on the graphic if parameter [0171] is not set.

0172. REMOTE - ACK : Assignment of the belonging function input of the remote acknowledgement.

0173. Switch op.mode (loc/rem) : Assignment of the belonging function input of the local/remote mode switch

0174. (P-) - kWh/pulse : Setting of kWh (revers active power) per counter pulse (zero means deactive)

0175. - pulse duration : Setting of the pulse duration; use the event [0175] to drive a binary output

0176. (Q+) - kvarh/pulse : Setting of kvarh reactive power (capacitive) per counter pulse (zero means deactive)


0178. (Q-) - kvarh/pulse : Setting of kvarh reactive power (inductive) per counter pulse (zero means deactive)


2480. Block ACK-key by event : Blocks the ACK-key if the event is active (except the reset of the beeper)

2481. Switch OFF LCD/LEDs by : Disables all LEDs and LCD Backlight if the event is active.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2482. Working hours limit 1 : 2483. Working hours limit 2 :

If the working hours counter [0152] reaches these limits, the event numbers [2482] or [2483] are getting active. The events will than remain active. The limits are disabled if the parameters are set to zero.

Service Manual


2.3 Nominal Ratio Values

With the nominal ratio values the user can select the different external transformer types (see figures 2-10 to 2-12).

Figure 2-10 Nominal Ratio Values-1


BACK EXIT

1000 A

0201. - Voltage : 25400 V

0202. - Active Power : 35195 kw

0203. - Frequency : 60 Hz

0204. CT Feeder -primary side : 1000 A

0205. PC Feeder -primary side : 25400 V

0206. -secondary side : 100 V

0207. PT BUS1 -primary side : 25400 V


0209. PT BUS2 -primary side : 25400 V


0211. PT GND1 -primary side : 25400 V

0200. NOMINAL RATED - Current :

NOMINAL RATIO VALUES Setting range:

0-65535 A

0-999999 V

0-999999 kW

50/60 Hz

0-65535 A

0-999999 V

0-65535 V

0-999999 V

0-65535 V

0-999999 V

0-65535 V

0-999999 V

BACK EXIT


0213. PT GND2 -primary side : 0 V


0215. CT GND1 -primary side : 1000 A

0216. -secondary side : 5 A

0217. CT GND2 -primary side : 0 A

0218. -secondary side : 0 A

0219. CT FIFF -primary side : 0 A

0220. Transf. winding ratio : 1.00

0221. Uaux nominal input : 110Vac

0222. Shunt#1 nominal input : 110Vac

0223. Shunt#2 nominal input : 110Vac

0224. CT DIEF2 – primary side : 0 A


0-65535 V

0-999999 V

0-65535 V

0-65535 A

0-65535 A

0-65535 A

0-65535 A

0-65535 A

0.01-99.99 Wprim/Ws

24 Vdc-230 Vac

24 Vdc-230 Vac

24 Vdc-230 Vac

0-65535 A

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 2-12 Nominal alue-3

0226.Gen freq measure range : Definition of the frequency measuring range. The following measuring ranges will be offered: 40-75Hz: 20-75Hz: 10-75Hz: These adjustments offer frequency measurements via the voltage inputs (X1.9/13) in the corresponding ranges. The measuring inputs for voltage and current are calibrated referring to the nominal frequency of the device. Due to the low-pass-filter in front of the analogous measuring inputs frequency deviation from the nominal frequency leads to measuring tolerances higher than the tolerance described in chapter (x.x.x). The frequency deviation from nominal frequency and the corresponding measuring tolerance have the following context: A frequency deviation of dF = 3Hz (dF = |FN – Fmeasure|) leads to an additional measuring tolerance of 1%. 20-130Hz: This adjustment offers a frequency measurement via the voltage inputs (X1.9/13) of 20…130Hz. The measuring inputs for voltage and current are calibrated at a frequency of 50Hz. If the measured frequency deviate from this calibration frequency (50Hz) than the measured frequency will be recalibrate automatically. Over the whole frequency range of 20…130Hz the maximum tolerance of 1,5% of the nominal measuring value won’t be exceeded.

BACK EXIT

0226. Gen.freq measure range : 40-75 Hz


40-75Hz, 20-75Hz, 10-75Hz,

20-130Hz

Service Manual




0200. NOMINAL RATED - Current : Setting of the nominal rated current of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer primary side

0201. - Voltage : Setting of the nominal rated voltage of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer primary side

0202. - Power : Setting of the nominal rated active power of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer primary side

0203. - Frequency : Setting of the nominal rated frequency of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer

0204. CT Feeder - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the feeder current measuring current transformer (CT)

0205. PT Feeder - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the feeder voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

NOTE: Event [0205] is activated if a negative sequence of the feeder voltage is detected. This supervision is always active.

0206. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the feeder voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

BACK EXIT

1.00

2460.NOM.SETTING – selector 1 : 0 ev.

2461. - selector 2 : 0 ev.

2462.NOM.SETTING 2 - current : 0 A

2463. - voltage : 0 V

2464. - power : 0 kW

2465. - freq. : 0 Hz


2467. - voltage : 0 V

2468. - power : 0 kW

2469. - freq. : 0 Hz


2471. - voltage : 0 V

2472. - power : 0 kW

2473. - freq. : 0 Hz

0225. Transf. winding 2 ratio :


0,01-99,99 Wprim/Ws

Event 0-9999

Event 0-9999

0-65000 A

0-65000 V

0-65000 kW

0-80 Hz

0-65000 A

0-65000 V

0-65000 kW

0-80 Hz

0-65000 A

0-65000 V

0-65000 kW

0-80 Hz

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0207.PT BUS1 - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the BUS1 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

NOTE: Event [0207] is activated if a negative sequence of the BUS1 voltage is detected. This supervision is always active.

0208. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the BUS1 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

0209. PT BUS2 - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the BUS2 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

NOTE: Event [0209] is activated if a negative sequence of the BUS2 voltage is detected. This supervision is always active.

0210. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the BUS2 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

0211. PT GND1 - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the ground #1 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

0212. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the ground #1 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

0213. PT GND2 - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the ground #2 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

0214. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the ground #2 voltage measuring voltage transformer (PT)

0215. CT GND1 - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the ground #1 current measuring current transformer (CT)

0216. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated current from the secondary side of the ground #1 current measuring current transformer (CT)

0217. CT GND2 - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the ground #2 current measuring current transformer (CT)

0218. - secondary side : Setting of the nominal rated current from the secondary side of the ground #2 current measuring current transformer (CT)

0219. CT DIFF - primary side : Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the differential current measuring current transformer (CT)

Service Manual


0220. Transf. winding ratio : In case of transformer differential protection, the winding ratio of the transformer (WPrimary/WSecondary) must be adjusted. Both by the “Step Down Trafo” and by the “Step Up Trafo” the winding ratio is defined as WPrimary/WSecondary. This corresponds by “Step Down Trafo” the transmision ratio (primaryvoltage/lowvoltage) of the transformer. With the „Step Up Trafo“ is however the winding ratio (WPrimary/WSecondary) the reciprocal value of the transmision ratio primaryvoltage/lowvoltage. From this a small number with many right-of-comma positions can result. Since the parameter [0220] of SYMAP® permits only two right-of-comma positions, if necessary, you must set the parameter [0220] on “1” and count this value into the parameter [0219].

0221. Uaux nominal input : Setting of nominal rated voltage of the power supply of the device

0222. Shunt #1 nominal input : Setting of nominal rated voltage of the shunt #1 trip circuit

0223. Shunt #2 nominal input : Setting of nominal rated voltage of the shunt #1 trip circuit

0224. CT DIFF2 - primary side : 0225. Transf. winding 2 ratio : 2460. NOM.SETTING - selector 1 : 2461. - selector 2 :

These parameters support the selection of up to 3 additional settings for the nominal current, voltage, power and frequency. If the selection has changed (parameters [2460] and [2461]) the device will reboot with the new nominals. Display on the main page (Setting No. (N#), In (A), Pn (kW), Un (V) and fn (Hz)) if the parameters [2460] and [2461] are set to a value greater zero.

Table 2-1 Nominal settings selectors

Nominal Settings Selectors

Selector Nominal setting

Valid nominal parameters

[2460] [2461] Current Voltage Power Frequency

inactive inactive 1 [0200] [0201] [0202] [0203]

active inactive 2 [2462] [2463] [2464] [2465]

inactive active 3 [2466] [2467] [2468] [2469]

active active 4 [2470] [2471] [2472] [2473]

2462. NOM.SETTING 2 - current : to

2473. NOM.SETTING 4 – freq : The nominals (I, U, P, f) must be within the setting range of 10-65000. Freqency range: 40-80 The ranges are also valid for the parameters [0200] to [0203]. The limit parameters [0678], [0682], [0683], [0907], [0947], [0948], [0954] and [0955] will be adapt internally in reference to parameter [0203] and the new selected nominal frequency.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.4 Communication

SYMAP® provides five communication ports. The RS232 port on the front panel is always available. Use it to upload the firmware or to communicate with the SYMAP® PC-tools. The other ports are on the backside, and they are programmable by the user with the parameters shown on Figures 2-13 and 2-14. Please note that the PROFIBUS and CANBUS ports are optional. Refer to the order list for detailed information.

Figure 2-14 Communication parameters-1


BACK EXIT

OFF

0301. - adresse : 0

0302. - baud rate : 57600 Bd

0303. - protocol : PC TOOLS

0304. PROFIBUS - com.port : OFF

0305. - adresse : 0

0306. - first byte : LOW

0307. - applivcation: none

0308. CAN 1 - com. port : OFF

0309. - number of nodes : 2

0310. - identifier : 01

0311. - identifier size : standard

0312. - baud rate :10000.0 Bd

0300. SERIAL PORT 1 (ASC1) :

COMMUNICATION PARAMETER Setting range:

OFF/RS485/RS422/MODEM

0-255

9600/19200/38400/57600/62500

PC TOOLS/MODBUS/KUHSE/REMOTE

OFF/ON

0-125

LOW/HIGH

None

ON/OFF

1-14

1-14

standard/extended

100,0-1000,0 kBd

BACK EXIT

0313. - autom.id. scan : OFF

0314. CAN 2 – com. port : ON

0315. - number of nodes : 1

0316. - idetifier : 1

0317. - idetifier size : standard

0318. - baud rate : 125.0 kBd

0319. - application :MDEC303 V1

0320. - MDEC overried : 0

0321. reseved :

0322. SERIAL PORT 2 (ASC2) : OFF

0323. - address : 0

0324. - baud rate : 625000 Bd

0625.Tel.No.- leading zeros : 0

0326. - Tel.No. part 1 : 0

0327. - Tel.No. part 2 : 0


OFF/ON

OFF/ON

1-32

0-65535

Standard/extended

15,6-1000,0 kBd

None,MDEC303all,...,CANopen, ADEC

0-9999

OFF/ON

0-65535

9600-625000 Bd

Service Manual




0300.SERIAL PORT 1 (ASC1) : Setting of the physical layer for this communication port; use the Terminals 26 (-) and 27 (+) of plug X2.2 for the RS485 communication. For RS422 use the Terminals 26 (RxD -), 27 (RxD +), 28 (TxD -) and 29 (TxD+) of the same plug. If you do not want to use one of these communications set this parameter to “OFF”.

0301. - address : Setting of the communication address of this device for RS 422/485

0302. - baudrate : Selection of the transmission speed for RS232/422/485; if there are some problems with the communication it may be useful to lower the speed.

0303. - protocol : Selection of the protocol type; table 2-2 shows the possible applications the device provides. For more details, please see Appendix A1.

Table 2-2 Available protocols

Parameter [0303] Description

PC TOOLS for the HIMAP-BCG-tools

MODBUS for communication with a main control unit

KUHSE special protocol

REMOTE for communication between two HIMAP-BCG devices

60870-103 for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

BlueVis.1 Special protocol for MTU’s Blue Vision interface (version 1)

BlueVis.2 Special protocol for MTU’s Blue Vision interface (version 2)

BACK EXIT

0328. IEC 61850 Communication : ON

0329. – IP address part 1 (L) : 192

0330. – IP address part 2 : 168

0331. – IP address part 3 : 2

0332. – IP address part 4 (R) : 120

0333. - Gateway address part1 : 192




0337. Time synchron. (SNTP) : ON

0338. – Daylight saving time : ON

0339. - Local time zone : + 1 h

0340. - Server address part 1 : 64





OFF/ON

0-255

0-255

0-255

0-255

0-255

0-255

0-255

0-255

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

-23 - +23

0-255

0-255

0-255

0-255

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0304.PROFIBUS - com. port : ON/OFF switch for the PROFIBUS port; the standard PROFIBUS DP V1 is fulfilled. The parameters [0304] to [0307] work only with this communication port.

NOTE: Event [0304] is active if the device is exchanging data with the master.

0305. - address : Setting of the communication address of this device for PROFIBUS communication; make sure that there is only one specific address in the communication.

0306. -first byte : Selection of the transmission sequence of a word (16 bit = 2 bytes) or of a long word (32 bit = 4 bytes); choose “HIGH” to transmit the high byte first or choose “LOW” to transmit the low byte first.

0307. - application : Reserved for special applications

0308. CAN1 - com. port : ON/OFF switch for the CANBUS1 port; the parameters [0308] to [0313] work only with this first CAN-communication port.

NOTE: If devices are connected over the CANBUS1 they will synchronize their RTCs (real time clocks) automatically. In this case, the RTC of the node with the smallest CAN-Identifier (parameter [0310]) is the reference for all other RTCs (extended board setting: see Users manual, chapter 1.8).

0309. - number of nodes : This parameter shows the number of devices connected to the CAN-communication. If there are less nodes than this number detected on the CANBUS1 system failure [3019] (“CAN1 node error”) will be activated.

NOTE: An extension board is not a node in this sense.

0310. - identifier : Setting of the communication identifier of this device for CAN-communication. Make sure that there is only one specific main device identifier in the communication. For the communication to the extension board CMA216 and CMA218, you must use this same identifier setting also for the extension board.

0311. - identifier size : Selection of the identifier format; choose “standard” for the 11 bit identifier; or choose “extended” for the 29 bit identifier.

0312. - baud rate : Selection of the transmission speed for CAN-communication; if there are some problems with the communication it may be useful to lower the speed.

0313. - autom. id. scan : The automatic allocation of the identifiers over the CANBUS1 can be enabled with this parameter. In that case the system failures [3008], [3019] and [3043] are disabled, and on the Main page “CAN: number of devices” is displayed instead of “NET” (Device type G). The system will reorganize the identifiers (starting with “1”) if more than one device with the same identifier parameter [0310] are detected on the CANBUS1. The allocation process takes around 15 sec. During this process the PM is idle and the “number of devices”-display is blinking.

Service Manual


0314. CAN2 - com. port : ON/OFF switch for the CANBUS2 port; the parameters [0314] to [0319] work only with this second CAN-communication port.

0315. - number of nodes : This parameter shows the number of devices connected to the CAN-communication.

0316. - identifier : Setting of the communication identifier of this device for CAN-communication; make sure that there is only one specific identifier in the communication.

0317. - identifier size : Selection of the identifier format; choose “standard” for the 11 bit identifier or choose “extended” for the 29 bit identifier.

0318. - baud rate : Selection of the transmission speed for CAN-communication; if there are some problems with the communication it may be useful to lower the speed.

0319. - application : This parameter defines the application of the second CANBUS-port. Table 2-3 shows the possible applications the device provides.

Table 2-3 Application of the second CANBUS-port

Parameter [0319] Description

none CANBUS2-port switched off

MDEC303 all Special communication protocol for MDEC controller (MTU); if MDEC application is in use then the baud rate of 125 kbaud will be set internally, as well as the identifier, 6, and the identifier size, standard. In version “V1” only the most important data will be displayed. With option “all”, all data of the protocol will be shown on LCD.

MDEC303 V1

CANopen For the CANopen protocol (refer to Appendix A1)

ADEC Special communication protocol for ADEC controller (MTU).

0320. - MDEC override : Only for CANBUS2 application: MDEC 303 If the set event number is active the MDEC function “override” also becomes active.

NOTE: This means that the MTU-diesel will NOT stop if any engine trouble occurs.

0322. SERIAL PORT 2 (ASC2) : This port is only available for special differential protection applications.

0323. - address : Setting of the communication address of this device

0324. - baud rate : Selection of the transmission speed

0325. Tel.No. - leading zeros : 0326. - Tel.No. part 1 : 0327. - Tel.No. part 2 :

These parameters are used for special modem applications.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


[0328. IEC 61850 Communication : The SYMAP® IEC61850 interface can be activated with parameter [P0328]. As soon as a link with the IEC 61850 client has established, the event [E0328] is being activated.

CAUTION: The serial channel is blocked if parameter [P0328] is enabled (so [P0328] must be disabled before up/downloading with the Parameter-Tool).

NOTE: The SYMAP® device consists of 20 “Logical Nodes” and 8 “Unbuffered Report Control Blocks”. “DataSets” can be freely defined. All the “DataModels” can be viewed in the SCL-file: “Symap IEC61850 Server.icd”.

0329. - IP address part 1(L) : 0330. - IP address part 2 : 0331. - IP address part 3 : 0332. - IP address part 4(R) :

The parameters [P0329] to [P0332] are used for setting the IP-address of the SYMAP® device. As soon as a Physical Ethernet Link has established, the event [E0329] is being activated.

0333. - Gateway address part 1 : 0334. - Gateway address part 2 : 0335. - Gateway address part 3 : 0336. - Gateway address part 4 :

These parameters are used for setting the Router-address of the gateway.

0337. Time synchron. (SNTP) : Time synchronization via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) can be activated by parameter [P0337]:

“OFF”: time synchronization is deactivated

“ON”: time synchronization is activated

0338. - Daylight saving time : Parameter [P0338] enables the automatic “Daylight saving time” switch (+1 hour between 1:00 UTC on last Sunday in March and 1:00 UTC on last Sunday in October)

0339. - Local time zone : With parameter [P0339] the local time zone can be adjusted (±12 hours offset to UTC (GMT)).

0339. - Server address part 1 : 0340. - Server address part 2 : 0341. - Server address part 3 : 0342. - Server address part 4 :

The time server IP-address can be set by parameters [P0340] to [P0343]. An Internet connection and a router (see parameters [P0333] to [P0336]) must exist in order to get in connection with an Internet time server. The SYMAP® operates as a client sending periodically requests to the time server (512 sec polling interval). The SYMAP® device accepts also SNTP-Broadcast messages via Local Broadcast or Multicast from a local time server (SCADA Systems). In that case parameters [P0340] to [P0343] can be set all to zero, the SYMAP® device will not send any requests.

NOTE: There is a timesync counter (only successfull messages are counted) on the status display page. Please press ENTER – DISPLAY – IEC61850 to invoke the counter.

Service Manual


2.5 Analog Inputs

Within the main device, there are four analog inputs available. The selection of two physical standards and many measuring types is possible. In combination with an external board, the number of function inputs can be extended. An extended board can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and output channels. The extended board is customized to individual client requirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 21 analog inputs PT 100 or analog inputs 4-20 mA channels. Figure 2-16 shows an example of the parameter setting for analog input 1. With the change of the measuring type, the unit of the measuring input will be adapted. Thus the unit of the following parameter will be changed automatically. The settings for the other analog inputs are the same with the exception of the parameter/event numbers. The parameter/event numbers for the other analog inputs are listed at the end of this chapter.

Figure 2-17 Analog Input “01”


CURRENT INPUT 1 -X2.4/54, 55 : Name of the analog input with plug number and terminal numbers

- Function : Selection of the physical standard for this special input

- Measuring type : This parameter defines the setting of the measuring type or the measuring unit. Table 2-4 shows all possible selections.

BACK EXIT

CURRENT INPUT 1 -X2.4/54,55

- Function : 0-20 mA

- Measuring type[unit] : mA

- Full scale : 0.0 mA

- Zero scale : 0.0 mA

0400. - 1.Limit : 0.0 mA

- 1.Limit high/low : LOW

0401. – 1.Limit delay time : 0.0 sec

0402. – 2.Limit : 0.0 mA



- Hysteresis : 5, %

SelectANALOG INPUT - Setting range:

OFF/0-20 mA/4-20 mA/0-10 V

See table 2-4

0,0-999,9 mA

0,0-999,9 mA

0,0-999,9 mA

LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 mA

LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

01

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Table 2-4 Measuring types for analogous Inputs

Setting Description

mA The unit of the input is mA

B1-Gas (bar)

Special application for GIS (NOTE: for this application the parameter “function” must be set to: 4-20 mA)

B1-Gas (g/l)

B2-Gas (bar)

B2-Gas (g/l)

S1-Gas (bar)

S1-Gas (g/l)

S2-Gas (bar)

S2-Gas (g/l)

Gas (bar)

Gas (g/l)

Temp. (C) The unit of the input is °C

Temp. (F) The unit of the input is Fahrenheit

Load (%)

The input can be used in combination with the asymmetric load controller (SYMAP®-XG/-BCG only). If parameter [0935] (analog input) is set, the measured value is the setpoint (actual value) for the asymmetric load controller. With the help of the full and zero scale adjustment, the range can be limited

RPM (%) The input can be used as a tacho input (SYMAP ®-XG/-BCG only). If parameter [0265] (see chapter 2.10.9) is set the measured value will be taken as a speed signal

Fuel (l) The unit of the input is liter

Fuel (m3) The unit of the input is m3

Voltage (V) The unit of this input is V

Percent (%) Can be used for any measuring

Bar The unit of the input is bar

CUR-OUT 1 With this types, the analog outputs can be feed back to the analog inputs in order to use the limit events of the analog inputs (The unit for this types are mA).

CUR-OUT 2

CUR-OUT 3

CUR-OUT 4

- Full scale : Adjustment of the full scale point (20 mA = ?)

- Zero scale : Adjustment of the zero scale point (0 or 4 mA = ?)

0400. -.1. Limit :

Setting of the first limit event of this analog input; if the actual measured value is higher or

lower than this limit event [0400] will be set.

- 1. Limit high/low : Selection of high or low level limit for parameter [0400]; in case of high limit, the actual measured value has to exceed the limit of parameter [0400]. In case of low limit, the actual value has to fall below the limit to set the corresponding event.

0401. - 1. Limit delay time : If event [0400] is active and this delay time is passed the event [0401] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0400]. Please use this parameter for the alarm controller.

Service Manual


0402. - 2. Limit :





- Hysteresis : Setting of the hysteresis for both limits

Table 2-5 Event numbers for the current inputs

Number of analogue input

Event number 1. Limit

Event number 1. Limit delay time



Analogue input 1 (4-20 mA) [0400] [0401] [0402] [0403]




2.5.1 PT100 Inputs

The following temperature measuring inputs (see figure 2-17) are only available with the listed extension boards (see table 2-6) (with the main device there are no PT100 inputs).

Table 2-6 Connectors for temperature measuring inputs

Number of analogue input CMA210 connectors (16 PT100 inputs)

CMA211 connectors (5 PT100 inputs)

05 (PT100-1) -X40: 1, 2, 3 -X44: 48, 49, 50

06 (PT100-2) -X40: 4, 5, 6 -X44: 51, 52, 53

07 (PT100-3) -X40: 7, 8, 9 -X44: 54, 55, 56

08 (PT100-4) -X40: 10, 11, 12 -X44: 57, 58, 59

09 (PT100-5) -X40: 13, 14, 15 -X44: 60, 61, 62

10 (PT100-6) -X40: 16, 17, 18 not available









19 (PT100-15) -X41: 46,47, 48 not available


The description shows an example of the parameter setting for PT100-1. The settings for the other temperature measuring inputs are the same with the exception of the parameter/event numbers.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 2-18 Analog Input “05”


PT100-1 ext.board -X40/1, 2, 3 :

Name of the analogous input with plug number and terminal numbers

- Function : Selection of using this special input (ON/OFF switch)

- Measuring type : Setting of the physical sensor (Up to now only PT100 possible)

- Full scale : Adjustment of the full scale point (for calibration only); the range of the input is depending on the hardware and not changeable with this parameter; for other ranges please contact the manufacturer.

- Zero scale : Adjustment of the zero scale point (for calibration only); the range of the input is depending on the hardware and not changeable with this parameter.

0416. - 1. Limit :





BACK EXIT

PT100- 1 ext.board -X40/1,2,3

- Function : OFF

- Measuring type[unit]: PT100 [C]

- Full scale : 320.0 C

- Zero scale : - 40.0 C

0416. - 1.Limit : + 0.0 C



0418. – 2.Limit : + 0.0 C



- Hysteresis : 5,0 %

SelectANALOG INPUT - : Setting range:

OFF/ON

PT100

0,0-999,9° C

-999,9°C to +999,9°C

-999,9°C to +999,9°C

LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 sec

-999,9°C bis +999,9°C

LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

05

Service Manual


0418. - 2. Limit :


lower than this limit, event [0418] will be set.



- Hysteresis : Setting of the hysteresis for both limits

Table 2-7 Event numbers for the temperature measuring inputs

Number of analogue input





05 (PT100-1) [0416] [0417] [0418] [0419]

06 (PT100-2) [0420] [0421] [0422] [0423]

07 (PT100-3) [0424] [0425] [0426] [0427]

08 (PT100-4) [0428] [0429] [0430] [0431]

09 (PT100-5) [0432] [0433] [0434] [0435]

10 (PT100-6) [0436] [0437] [0438] [0439]

11 (PT100-7) [0440] [0441] [0442] [0443]

12 (PT100-8) [0444] [0445] [0446] [0447]

13 (PT100-9) [0448] [0449] [0450] [0451]

14 (PT100-10) [0452] [0453] [0454] [0455]

15 (PT100-11) [0456] [0457] [0458] [0459]

16 (PT100-12) [0460] [0461] [0462] [0463]

17 (PT100-13) [0464] [0465] [0466] [0467]

18 (PT100-14) [0468] [0469] [0470] [0471]

19 (PT100-15) [0472] [0473] [0474] [0475]

20 (PT100-16) [0476] [0477] [0478] [0479]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.6 Binary Inputs

SYMAP® provides with its basic unit 14 function inputs for user defined applications (see figure 2-18 and table 2-8). In combination with an external board, the number of function inputs can be extended. An extended board can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and output channels. The extended board is customized to individual client requirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 36 digital inputs channels.

Figure 2-19 Binary Inputs-1


- Select : Selects an binary input

0500. - Condition : Condition of the input; if the input is active event [0500] will be set. Conditions:

“NORM.OPEN”: The input is normally open.

“NORM.CLSD”: The input is normally closed.

“N.O. + W.F.”: The input is normally open and the wirefault supervision is active.

“N.C. + W.F.”: The input is normally closed and the wirefault supervision is active.

NOTE: The wirefault supervision is only available for the function inputs 10-23. Every input has a unique wirefault event number ([3321] to [3334]). These events can be used for alarming. Refer to table 2-8.

“N.O. + INV.”: The input is normally open and the inverted event is released.

“N.C. + INV.”: The input is normally closed and the inverted event is released.

NOTE: Only the after delay event will be inverted. Every input has a unique “Binary inputs inverted after delay event” ([3501] to [3599]). Refer to the event list in the Appendix A2.

BACK EXIT

0500. - Condition : NORM.OPEN

0501. - Time delay: 0.0 sec

FUNC.10 INPUT -X2.3/30

BINARY INPUT EVENT – Select: Setting range:

*

0,0-6000,0 sec

*NORM.OPEN/NORM.CLSD/

N.O.+W.F./N.C.+W.F/

N.O.+INV./N.C.+INV.

500

Service Manual


0501. - Time delay : If the input is active and the delay is passed event [0501] will be set.

Table 2-8 shows the function inputs of the basic unit which can be used. All function inputs have the same parameters with exception of the event and terminal numbers.

Table 2-8 Function inputs

Function Input

Eventnumber Event number

after delay Wire fault

Event number Plug/Terminal

10 [0500] [0501] [3321] X2.3/30

11 [0502] [0503] [3322] X2.3/31

12 [0504] [0505] [3323] X2.3/32

13 [0506] [0507] [3324] X2.3/33

14 [0508] [0509] [3325] X2.3/34

15 [0510] [0511] [3326] X2.3/35

16 [0512] [0513] [3327] X2.3/36

17 [0514] [0515] [3328] X2.3/37

18 [0516] [0517] [3329] X2.3/38

19 [0518] [0519] [3330] X2.3/39

20 [0520] [0521] [3331] X2.3/40

21 [0522] [0523] [3332] X2.3/41

22 [0524] [0525] [3333] X2.3/42

23 [0526] [0527] [3334] X2.3/43

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.6.1 Wire fault alarm

The binary inputs of the SYMAP®-family are equipped with a wire fault protection. So the user have the possibility to supervise the operatability of safety applications.


0055. - BIN.-inputs W.F.-limit : Limit of the wire fault event; remain the level of the binary input under this level, the related wire fault event is active (see table 2-8). Default setting: 20 LSB

0076. - BIN.- input low-limit : Upper limit of the input low level; default setting: 150 LSB

0077. - BIN.- input high-limit : Lower limit of the input high level; default setting: 180 LSB

These parameters could only be changed with the parametertool under EXTRAS/SPECIAL PARAMETER.

Structure of the wire fault alarm: For a proper working a resistor (10 kΩ) must be installed close to the switching contact of the supervised line (see figure 2-26).

Figure 2-20 Structure and voltage level of the wire fault alarm

Functional description: There is a current conduction through the resistor even when the contact –K1 is open which turned out a voltage level of approx. 3 V to 4 V (30 LSB to 40 LSB) at the binary input. Regarding to the shown parameter settings, this is recognized as a LOW input level. If there is a wire fault at any part of the line the voltage break down and the related wire fault events (common event [3320] and [33xx]) get active. On the other hand, if the contact –K1 close there is a bypass to the resistor and the input is recognized as HIGH.

SYMAP®

10k

-K 1

-X2.3/45 (+24V)

-X2.3/30 -43 (binary input)

-K1 open

-K1 closed

Wire fault

Voltage level

(binary inputs) LSB (ADC)

255 LSB

180 LSB Parameter

150 LSB Parameter

20 LSB Parameter

0 LSB

24V

17V

14V

2V

0V

Service Manual


2.7 Analogous Outputs

The basic unit of SYMAP® provides four analogous outputs. For each output, parameters for the function, the physical range and calibration are available (see figures 2-20 and 2-21). In combination with an external board, the number of function outputs can be extended. An extended board can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and output channels. The extended board is customized to individual client requirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 8 analogous outputs 4-20 mA channels.

Figure 2-21 Analogous Outputs-1

Figure 2-22 Analogous Outputs-2

The analogous outputs can be used to convert measuring and processed values to analogous outputs such as 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. Table 2-9 shows the selection possibilities of analogous output function parameters ([0600], [0605], [0610] and [0615]).

BACK EXIT

0601. - range : 4-20 mA

0602. - zero scale: 0,0 %

0603. - full scale: 100,0 %

0604. - adjust : 100,0 %

0605. CUR-OUT 2 - fuction : U-averge

0606. - range : 4-20 mA

0607. - zero scale: 0,0 mA

0608. - full scale: 100,0 %

0609. - adjust : 100,0 %

0610. CUR-OUT 3 - function :I1-current

0611. - range : 4-20 mA

0600. CUR-OUT 1 - function : U12-VOLT.

ANALOGOUS OUTPUTS Setting range:

See table 2-9

OFF/0-20 mA/4-20 mA

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

See table 2-9

OFF/0-20 mA/4-20 mA

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

See table 2-9

OFF/0-20 mA/4-20 mA

BACK EXIT


0613. - full scale: 100,0 %

0614. - adjust : 100,0 %

0615. CUR-OUT 4 – funktion :I-GND1-cur

0616. - range : 4-20 mA


0618. - full scale: 100,0 %

0619. - adjust : 100,0 %

ANALOGOUS OUTPUTS Setting range:

0,0-999,9 mA

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

See table 2-9

OFF/0-20 mA/4-20 mA

0,0-999,9 mA

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Table 2-9 Selection possibilities of analogous output function parameters

Function Description

OFF The output is disabled

I1-current Actual current of phase 1



I-average Average current of phase 1-3

U12-Volt Line voltage U1 to U2



U-average Average voltage of all line voltages

U-BUS1 av. Average BUS1 voltage of all line voltages

U-BUS2 av. Average BUS2 voltage of all line voltages

Constant The value can be set with the “Adjust” (0-100.0% -> 0-20mA). The “Zero scale” must be set to 0.0%, the “Full scale” must be set to 100.0% and the Range to 0-20mA.

I-GND1-Cur Ground current 1

I-GND2-Cur Ground current 2

P apparent Apparent power

UGND1-Volt. Ground voltage 1

UGND2-Volt Ground voltage 2

Pw Active power

Pq Reactive power

Net load Type XG/BCG only: relative net power

SPIreserve Type XG/BCG only: the relative net spinning reserve

Pw-GND1 Active ground power of Ignd1 and Ugnd1

Pw-GND2 Active ground power of Ignd2 and Ugnd2

Frequency Frequency of feeder system

BUS1-Freq. Frequency of BUS1 system

BUS2-Freq Frequency of BUS2 system

PF pow.fac. Power factor of feeder system

U1-Volt Voltage U1 to ground



Speed ctrl Type XG/BCG only: corresponds to ANSI 15 - speed matching device

Volt. ctrl Type XG/BCG only: corresponds to ANSI 15 - voltage matching device

MTU speed MDEC speed (nominal = 3000 rpm)

MTU inject MDEC injection quantity (nominal = 100%)

MTU T-lube MDEC Temperature lube oil (nominal = 100 °C)

MTU T-cool MDEC Temperature coolant (nominal = 100 °C)

MTU T-air MDEC Temperature charge air (nominal = 100 °C)

MTU T-fuel MDEC Temperature fuel (nominal = 100 °C)

MTU T-intc MDEC Temperature coolant intercooler (nominal = 100 °C)

MTU P-lube MDEC Pressure lube oil (nominal = 10.0 bar)

MTU P-air MDEC Pressure charge air (nominal = 5.0 bar)

MTU P-fuel MDEC Pressure fuel (nominal = 15.0 bar)

MTU Prfuel MDEC Pressure fuel rail (nominal = 1600 bar)

Speed rpm Type XG/BCG only: the diesel speed in rpm

LSsetpoint Type XG/BCG only: the setpoint of the Load sharing controller (see chapter 2.10.3)

CAN1 - I Type XG/BCG only: The generator current, voltage, power and frequency of the first 6 nodes of the CANBUS1

CAN1 - U

CAN1 - P

CAN1 - f

Service Manual


CAN2 - I

CAN2 - U

CAN2 - P

CAN2 - f

CAN3 - I

CAN3 - U

CAN3 - P

CAN3 - f

Type XG/BCG only: The generator current, voltage, power and frequency of the first 6 nodes of the CANBUS1

CAN4 - I

CAN4 - U

CAN4 - P

CAN4 - f

CAN5 - I

CAN5 - U

CAN5 - P

CAN5 - f

CAN6 - I

CAN6 - U

CAN6 - P

CAN6 - f

PT100-1

The PT100 Analog inputs. All 16 possible inputs from any external board can be selected. The nominal value is assumed as +320°C

PT100-2

PT100-3

PT100-4

PT100-5

PT100-6

PT100-7

PT100-8

PT100-9

PT100-10

PT100-11

PT100-12

PT100-13

PT100-14

PT100-15

PT100-16

CW sum max The max. phase Contact wear (see ANSI – CW Contact wear measurement).

Comm. AO 1 With this functions it is possible to drive an analog output directly over Profibus (Module 30, Instruction Nr. 60-63) or Modbus (Function Code 6, Register Address 60-63).

Comm. AO 2

Comm. AO 3

Comm. AO 4

LSsetp.2 Outputs the sym/asy load sharing setpoint if the load sharing is active in sym/asy. Otherwise the actual gen power (%) is outputted.

RGSP kW Outputs the Remain Generator Surplus Power: RGSP kW = ((capacity sum of gen in auto and not in load reduction) + (actual load sum of gen in manu or in load reduction)) – net load. RGSP % = ((RGSP kW) / (capacity sum of gen in auto and not in load reduction) * 100 %. The RGSP kW is scaled in the following way: 0 - 4000kW -> 4-20mA

RGSP %

Each analogous output provides five parameters for adjustment. The following parameters refer to analogous output 1, which are representative for all analogous outputs.

Service Manual

SYMAP®



0600. CUR-OUT 1 - function : Output selection for analogous output 1 (X2.4 49 and 50)

0601. - range : Selection of the output range: 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or OFF

0602. - zero scale : The zero point adjustment (0 or 4 mA = xx %)

0603. - full scale :

Full scale adjustment (20 mA = xx %)

0604. - adjust : Total linear scale adjustment (calibration)

Table 2-10 Terminals of analogous outputs

Analogous output

Plug - Terminals

1 X2.4 - 49, 50 (+)

2 X2.4 - 49, 51 (+)

3 X2.4 - 49, 52 (+)

4 X2.4 - 49, 53 (+)

Service Manual


2.8 Binary Outputs

The basic unit of SYMAP® provides 12 binary outputs. The outputs are organized as table 2-11. In combination with an external board, the number of function outputs can be extended. An extended board can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and output channels. The extended board is customized to individual client requirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 24 Relay outputs channels (see chapter 2.8.3).

Table 2-11 Binary outputs

No. Output name Event number Description

1 Shunt #1 [0700] used for breaker trip events

2 Shunt #2 [0701]

3 Lockout relay [0702] and [0703] special relay for lock-out purpose

4 CB synchron ON [0704] and [0705] used for synchronizing unit

5-12 Function 1-8 [0706]-[0720] free programmable outputs

2.8.1 Shunt #1 output

Figure 2-23 Shunt #1


Events 01 to 20 : "HIGH" active events to activate the event [0700]

Event 21 : "HIGH" active event to enable the event [0700]

Event 22 : "LOW" active event to enable the event [0700]

NOTE: The Shunt #1 output is the fastest binary output SYMAP® offers. So it should be used for time critical operations such as fast protection functions like ANSI 50 to open a circuit breaker.

BACK EXIT

Shunt #1 -X2.1/18,19

Events:

01:1402 11: 0

02:1405 12: 0

03:1408 13: 0

04: 0 14: 0

05: 0 15: 0

06: 0 16: 0

07: 0 17: 0

08: 0 18: 0

09: 0 19: 0

10: 0 20: 0

SelectBINARY OUTPUT EVENT 700

<1

&

<1

21:9999

22: 0 700

Note: 0=OFF

9999=ON

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.8.2 Shunt #2 output

Figure 2-24 Shunt #2


Events 01 to 20 : "HIGH" active events to activate the event [0701]

Event 21 : "HIGH" active event to enable the event [0701]

Event 22 : "LOW" active event to enable the event [0701]

BACK EXIT

Shunt #1 -X2.1/20,21

Events:

01: 0 11: 0

02: 0 12: 0

03: 0 13: 0

04: 0 14: 0

05: 0 15: 0

06: 0 16: 0

07: 0 17: 0

08: 0 18: 0

09: 0 19: 0

10: 0 20: 0


≥ 1

&

21:9999

22: 701

Note: 0=OFF

9999=ON

≥ 1

Service Manual


2.8.3 Lockout relay

The lockout relay is a bistable (two states) relay, which can be used as lockout relay or as a normal

binary output (see figure 2-24). If the lockout features are requested please refer to ANSI 94 device

code to activate the lockout relay (see chapter 3.32).

Figure 2-25 Failure lock out


- Select : Selects a binary output

- Condition : Polarity of the output; if the logic is fulfilled event [0703] will be set.

- Time delay : If the logic is fulfilled and the delay is passed the binary output and event [0702] will be set.

1. Event : to

6. Event : Events to activate or to block the output

BACK EXIT

Lockout relay - X2.1/16,17

- Codition : NORM.OPEN

- Time delay: 0,0 sec

1.Event: 0

2.Event: 0

3.Event: 0

4.Event: 0

5.Event: 9999

6.Event: 0


&

Note:0=OFF,9999=ON

0703

0702

Setting range:

NORM.OPEN/NORM.CLSD

0,0-999,9 sec

≥ 1

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.8.4 Synchron ON output

SYMAP® provides a “synchron ON” output used for the synchronizing units to release or block the circuit breakers during synchronization (see figure 2-25). This output has a redundant. That means two independent controllers of the SYMAP® system have to release with their own relay the “synchron ON” output before the main contact (-X2.1/1,2) will be activated. If no synchronizing unit is in use that means that the following three parameters have been set to “0” (parameter [1000], parameter [1030] and parameter [1060]). This output can be used in the same way as the Function outputs 1 to 8.

Figure 2-26 Synchron ON



- Condition : Polarity of the output; if the logic is fulfilled event [0705] will be set.

- Time delay : If the logic is fulfilled and the delay is passed the binary output and event [0704] will be set.

1. Event : to

6. Event : Events to activate or block the output

BACK EXIT

CB Synchron ON - X2.1/1,2



1.Event: 0

2.Event: 0

3.Event: 0

4.Event: 0

5.Event: 9999

6.Event: 0


&

Note:0=OFF,9999=ON

0705

0704

Setting range:

NORM.OPEN/NORM.CLSD

0,0-999,9 sec

≥ 1

Service Manual


2.8.5 Function outputs

For binary outputs 8 further relay outputs are available (see figure 2-26 and table 2-12).

Figure 2-27 Function outputs



Table 2-12 Parameters of function outputs

Select: Text: Terminal:

[0700] Shunt #1 X2.1/18, 19

[0701] Shunt #2 X2.1/20, 21

[0702] Lockout relay X2.1/16, 17

[0704] CB Synchron ON X2.1/1, 2

[0706] Func. 1 X2.1/3, 5

[0708] Func. 2 X2.1/4, 5

[0710] Func. 3 X2.1/6, 8

[0712] Func. 4 X2.1/7, 8

[0714] Func. 5 X2.1/9, 11

[0716] Func. 6 X2.1/10, 11

[0718] Func. 7 X2.1/12, 13

[0720] Func. 8 X2.1/14, 15

- Condition : Polarity of the output; if the logic is fulfilled the predelay event will be set.

- Time delay : If the logic is fulfilled and the delay is passed the binary output and the after delay event will be set.

1. Event : to

6. Event : Events to activate or block the output

BACK EXIT

FUNC.x - X2.1/x,y



1.Event: 0

2.Event: 0

3.Event: 0

4.Event: 0

5.Event: 9999

6.Event: 0

SelectBINARY OUTPUT EVENT 7xx

&

Note:0=OFF,9999=ON

07xx

07xx

Setting range:

NORM.OPEN/NORM.CLSD

0,0-999,9 sec

≥ 1

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.9 Event Builder

The event builder offers several possibilities to combine events and to build user defined applications. The various logic elements can be accessed through the following overview list. This list is placed in the menu tree as follows: MENU > SETTING > SYSTEM > Event builder (see figure 2-28). The first 3 items (Breaker control, Interlock diagrams, Breaker test mode) are linked to the breaker control and can not be used for other purposes. The other elements can be used for any applications.

Figure 2-28 Event builder

NOTE: For details refer to the Appendix A2.

BACK EXIT

Interlock diagrams

Breaker test mode

Logic diagrams (800-839)

AND elements (840-849)

OR elements (850-859)

AND / OR (860-869)

Timer (870-889)

Counter (890-894)

Flip-flops (895-899)

CAN events (370-392)

Breaker control

EVENT BUILDER

Service Manual


2.10 Power management (main menu)

The power management function is an additional software package available only for SYMAP® XG/BCG. If the power management software is loaded, the following parameters are available (see figure 2-28).

Figure 2-29 Power management (main menu)

BACK EXIT

Power management

Load sharing

Frequency controller

Voltage regulator

Power factor controller

Big consumer request (BCR)

Blackout

Diesel control

Starting phase

Stopping phase

Preferential trip limits

Additional limits

General

POWER MANAGEMENT

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.1 General PM Parameter

This group comprises the general settings for power management (see figures 2-29 and 2-30).

Figure 2-30 General settings for power management-1

Figure 2-31 General settings for power management-2


0180. Generator - number : Number of generator; this number is shown in the main page and is used by the power manager for all event histories to show the user which generator has been started and stopped.

BACK EXIT

: 01

0181. - priority: 01

0182.Net selectors - 1.ev.(L): 509

0183. - 2.ev.(R): 0

0184.Automatic mode : 511

0185.Start rease : 513

0186.Start next diesel : 0

0187.Remot start : 515

0188.Remot stop : 517

0189.Load balance after start : 10sec

0190.Mains parallel operation : 0

0191.Manual mode type : MANUAL 1

0192.Priority select by event : 504

0193. - 1.event : 519

0180.Generator - number

GENERAL PM PARAMETER Setting range:

1-14

1-14

0-9999 (Event number)







0-9999 sec


MANUAL 1-6



BACK EXIT

0194. - 2.event : 521

0195. - 3.event : 0

0196. - 4.event : 0

0197.Reamin in manual : NO

0198.Secure front key access : 512

0199.Start next alarm block : 0

2400.Nominal power reduction : CURR.3

2401. - Pn zero scale point : 70.0 %

2402. - scale adjustment : 100.0 %

2403.Request own power by : 0

2404. – power not avail.event

2405.Preselect prio. By event : 0

2406. - priority: 1

2407.Change to MANUAL : 0

2408.Mainpage LS/PM status : NET

2409.User acces definition : none

2410.Automatic net selection : ON

GENERAL PM PARAMETER Setting range:




NO/YES


Event 0-9999

OFF/CURR.1 – CURR.4

0,0-100,0 %

50,0-150,0 %


--- (Eventnummer)

Event 0-9999

1-14


NET/OWN

None/Prio+Loard

OFF/ON

Service Manual


0181. - priority : Priority of the diesel generator; the priority is used to define the start and stop sequence for the power management. The priority is shown in the main page. The priority can also be changed on the load page or over MODBUS-communication if parameter [0192] is OFF.

0182. Net selector -1.ev.(L) : 0183. -2.ev.(R) :

The net selectors define the BUS section to which the circuit breaker of the corresponding generator has been connected. A maximum of four BUS sections can be recognized.

Example: If a bus tie-breaker is in use the user can link the auxiliary output of the bus tie-breaker with a function input. The event number of this function input has to be used for the net selector parameter to define the BUS sections (see table 2-13).

NOTE: Please place parameter [2410] on “OFF” when using up to four nets and consider the description of parameter [2410] when using more than four nets.

Table 2-13 Net selectors

Net selectors

[0183] [0182] Net

inactive inactive 0

inactive active 1

active inactive 2

active active 3

0184. Automatic mode : Automatic mode release; an event number is used to release the automatic mode (e.g. via a function input).

Example: A function input is used to release the automatic mode. If the function input is active the automatic mode will be automatically set and the user can switch between automatic and manual. If the function input is inactive the manual mode is fixed and blocked.

Event numbers linked to the modes:

[2905]: manual mode

[2906]: automatic mode

0185. Start release : Start release of the aggregate; the user can activate an event number to allow the starting of the aggregate (e.g. via a function input).

Example: The user can activate a function input to allow the starting. If the function input is active the starting of the aggregate is allowed. If the function input is inactive all start orders will be blocked and the device will switch to fixed manual mode. In this case event [0185] (“start block”) will become active. Use this event for an alarm message.

0186. Start next diesel by : The user can start the next aggregate from the start list by event.

Example: The user can activate a function input to start an aggregate which is next in the stand-by sequence. If the state of the function input changes to active this aggregate will be started. Only this trigger condition starts the aggregate.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0187.Remote Start : The user can start the own aggregate from remote by an event.

Example: The user can activate a function input to start the “own” aggregate from remote. If the state of the function input changes to active the “own” aggregate will be started. Only this trigger condition starts the aggregate.

0188. Remote Stop : The user can stop the “own” aggregate from remote by an event.

Example: The user can activate a function input to stop the “own” aggregate from remote. If the state of the function input changes to active the “own” aggregate will be stopped. Only this trigger condition stops the aggregate. This function is independent of PM parameter [0912] (Stop block by event).

0189. Load balance after start : If the power management starts a diesel generator (e.g. big consumer request) then after the circuit breaker is switched on, the process will be delayed to balance the load before the next action from the power manager happens (e.g. big consumer release).

0190. Mains parallel operation : In case of mains parallel operation, some regulators (e.g. asymmetric load control) have other conditions. With this event number (e.g. function input), the system recognizes mains parallel or insulated operation.

0191. Manual mode type : There are several manual mode types available (see table 2-14).

Table 2-14 Automatic/Manual mode functions

AUTOMATIC/MANUAL MODE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONS AUTOMATIC MANUAL MODE

1 2 3 4 5 6

KEYS

BREAKER ON X X X X X

BREAKER OFF X X X X X

START X X X X X

STOP X X X X X

EMERGENCY STOP X X X X X X

START

REMOTE X X X X

COMMUNICATION X X X X

PM X

NEXT DIESEL X

BLACKOUT X

STOP

REMOTE X X X X

COMMUNICATION X X X X

PM X

CONTROLLER

LOAD SHARING X X X X

FREQUENCY X X X X

VOLTAGE X X X X

POWER FACTOR X X X X

0192.Priority select by event : With this event the selectors can be enabled. It is not possible to change the priority over another source (e.g. load page or communication) if the selectors are enabled.

Service Manual


0193. - 1. Event : 0194. - 2. Event : 0195. - 3. Event : 0196. - 4. Event :

With the four events (e.g. from binary inputs) a priority can be selected (see table 2-15).

Table 2-15 Priority selectors

PRIORITY SELECTORS

EVENTS PRIORITY

[0196] [0195] [0194] [0193]

0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 2

0 0 1 0 3

0 0 1 1 4

0 1 0 0 5

0 1 0 1 6

0 1 1 0 7

0 1 1 1 8

1 0 0 0 9

1 0 0 1 10

1 0 1 0 11

1 0 1 1 12

1 1 0 0 13

1 1 0 1 14

1 1 1 0 -

1 1 1 1 -

0197. Remain in manual : This parameter controls the trigger of the automatic mode:

“NO”: After an alarm with priority disappears, the mode will switch back to automatic (if automatic was active before the alarm). The mode is stored nonvolatile.

“YES”: After system start or if an alarm with priority disappears the mode will always remain in manual.

0198. Secure front key access : With this parameter the access to the START/STOP/AUTO/MANU. – front keys can be protected with an password (also the Load page – Command window).

assigned event inactive: free access to the keys

assigned event active: The keys are protected with Code #1 (see chapter 2.1). The keys are released for 30 seconds after the right password is entered.

0199. Start next alarm block : If an alarm with start next priority is active and the event set by parameter [0199] is active a start next command will be given only if the CB is closed or the generator is in AUTO and starting.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2400. Nominal power reduction : The nominal power reduction can be used for shaft generator operation. This parameter enables the function and selects an analog input (see chapter 2.5). The analog input must be also enabled:

“Function”: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA

“Measuring type”: mA

“Full scale”: sets the upper cutoff point of the current signal (e.g. 16.8 mA)

“Zero scale”: sets the lower cutoff point of the current signal (e.g. 5.8 mA)

2401. - Pn zero scale point : Defines the lowest power value for the nominal power reduction (e.g. 40.0 %)

NOTE: The upper value is always 100.0 %.

2402. - scale adjustment : Linear calibration of the mA-scale between the full and the zero scale; this parameter is normally set to 100.0%.

Figure 2-31 shows an example for the nominal power reduction.

Figure 2-32 Nominal power reduction

NOTE: On the analog inputs page (MENU > DISPLAY > METERS), the following nominal power reduction values are shown as:

the actual mA value, and

the reduced nominal power in % and in kW

2403. Request own power by : This function can be used to request the own actual power (in kW) from the net before the own generator is stopped. The event from parameter [2403] activates the request. The function will calculate the load situation in the own net, without the power of the own generator (assuming that the own generator should be stop). If the future net power reserve is insufficient the function will start one or more stand-by generator. Finally, if the power reserve is available event [2403] will be activated. This event can be used to trigger a stop (e.g. over parameter [0188]).

2404. - power not avail. Event :. This event is related to the function from parameter [2403]. If it is not possible to provide the requested own power from the net (e.g. there are no stand-bys) this event will be activated. It can be used to trigger an alarm.

Pn (%)100.0

40.0

5.8 16.8mA

Service Manual


2405. Preselect prio. by event : 2406. - priority :

If the event set on parameter [2405] changes from inactive to active the priority will be set once to the value of parameter [2406].

2407.Change to MANUAL mode : If the event set on parameter [2407] changes from inactive to active the mode will be changed once to MANUAL.

2408. Mainpage LS/PM status : This parameter affects the display of the Load sharing (LS) status and the Power Management (PM) status on the main page and the Diesel Overview page:

“NET”: The status shows the summary of all nodes in the same net.

“OWN”: The status shows only the own device.

2409. User access definition : This parameter defines the possibilities to change the generator priority by the user. If this parameter is set to “Prio+Load”, the Priority page is not visible in the menu, it is not possible to give any commands over the Load Command page, and it is not possible to change the priority through the communication interfaces.

2410. Automatic net selection : “Automatic net selection” can be used up to 4 nets in mode “OFF” and up to 14 nets in mode “ON”. These two kinds of net switching can be selected. Use parameter [2410] „Automatic net selection” to select „ON“ or „OFF“.

Automatic net selection: „OFF“ Two digital inputs can be used for coding the net number. The position of the bus coupler has to be coded and send to the inputs of SYMAP® devices, parameters [0182] and [0183]. The two parameters [0182] and [0183] are binary coded, so that four nets (net 0, 1, 2 and 3) can be selected.

Example: There is a net with four generators and a bus coupler between Gen2 and Gen3. With closed bus coupler all SYMAP® devices would be selected the net No. 0. In this case no switching of the nets by the parameters [0182] and [0183] are necessary. If the bus coupler opens, the both „right” handed generators must be switched into another net, different from 0. The auxiliary contact of the bus coupler activates the parameters [0182] in both SYMAP® devices on the right side. Both SYMAP® devices must be on net 1. Thereby the both „right“- and „left“ handed SYMAP® devices are in different nets and each net for itself controls its own power management system.

Automatic net selection: “ON” The complete network switching is functioning automatically. Fourteen nets can be handed. Each SYMAP® device gets an input signal from the corresponding left- and right- handed bus coupler. The signal of the left handed bus coupler to the generator is given on the parameter [0182] and the signal of the right handed bus coupler on the parameter [0183]. A signal 0 (low) means that the bus coupler is closed. Accordingly a 1 (high) signal means that the bus coupler is open. The devices must be numbered in ascending order starting with 1 from „left to the right” in the CAN1-Identifier (parameter [0310])!! The net numbering starts with the device with CAN1-Identifier [1] and according to the bus couple ring positions it is counted up from 1 to max. 14 “left to right”!

Service Manual

SYMAP®


NOTE: If no ring net is present, the device with the CAN1-Identifier [1], the parameter [0182] must be set to 9999 and the SYMAP® device with the last CAN1- Identifier, the parameter [0183] must be set to 9999 (in this case the bus couplers at both ends are open).

Ring net: First SAMYP® device with the CAN1-Identifier [1] has a speciality. If the left bus coupler is closed, all SYMAP® device change to ring net control. Also the last SYMAP® device needs an input of the right bus coupler. The last generator can also have in addition a right handed bus coupler.

NOTE: The SYMAP® device with CAN1-Identifier [1], input left bus coupler (parameter [0182]), connects the system with the last SYMAP® device to a ring net.

If no bus couplers exist, the values of parameters [0182] and [0183] is set to 9999. It is important that the sequence of the generators with the corresponding SYMAP® devices runs with the CAN1-Identifiern from „left to the right” in ascending from one onwards in a row. In case of a failure of one SYMAP® device, the power management can be further operated, because the bus coupler feedbacks are given in each device to the two surround SYMAP® devices. In this case the event [3019] „CAN1 node error” is activated on all devices. The feedback of the bus is also monitored. In case of differences in the position of the bus coupler the event [2410] with an announcement “Auto. Net error” will be activated. The events [2410] and [3019] can be directed to an alarm channel for signalling.

G1

[0182] [0183]

[0310] = 1

SYMAP®

G2

[0182] [0183]

[0310] = 2

SYMAP®

Cable

TB

TB

Cable

TB

[0182] [0183]

[0310] = 3

SYMAP®

G3

TB

G14

[0182] [0183]

[0310] = 14

SYMAP®

TB

…

Figure 2-33 Power Management System for max. 14 Generators in one line and ring net (Automatic net selection: “ON”)

Service Manual


2.10.2 Power management

The power management parameters offer two main functionalities (philosophies) for the load-depending starting and stopping within a BUS section. Each function can be activated independently of the other one (but it is advisable to decide for only one).

The first function (parameters [0900] to [0917]) is operating on several limits for starting and stopping (classical P.M.).

Within the second function (parameters [2430] to [2449]), up to eight load ranges can be defined. For every load range a combination of up to five generators (priorities) can be defined, which should be connected to the BUS. The system will manage to start and/or stop the generator according to the load ranges.

Figure 2-34 Power mamagement-1


BACK EXIT

: 0

0901. - characteristic : ON->OFF

0902. START – check limits : SINGLE

0903. - 1.load limit : 70.0 %

0904. - delay : 200 sec

0905. - 2.load limit : 90.0 %

0906. - delay : 30 sec

0907. - low frequency : 58.00 Hz

0908. - delay : 5 sec

0909. - high current : 70.0 %

0910. - delay : 200 sec

0911. STOP - with priority : LOW

0900. P.M - switch by event

POWER MANAGEMENT Setting range:


ON->OFF/OFF->ON

SINGLE/AVERAGE

0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

0,00-999,99 Hz

0-9999 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

LOW/HIGH

BACK EXIT

0912. - block by event : 510

0913. - remaining load : 60.0 %

0914. - remaining curr. : 60.0 %

0915. delay : 300 sec

0916.Stop without runn.down : NO

0917.Block own start by event : 0

0918.Prio. Shifter work count : 0 h

2430.LOAD RANGES – by event : 507

2431. – change to upper range : 3 sec

2432. – change to lower range : 100 sec

2433. – load range hysteresis : 2.5 %



0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

NO/YES


0-65535 h


0-9999 sec

0-9999 sec

0,0-999,9 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®




0900. P.M. - switch by event : Event switch for the first power management function; this switch affects only the parameters [0901] to [0917]. All devices in one net must have this switch enabled for activation!

0901. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of power management ON/OFF switch parameter [0900]:

“ON -> OFF”: If event of PM-switch is active power management will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If event of PM-switch is active power management will be switched on.

0902. START - check limits :

Checking single or average start limits this parameter is valid for [0903], [0905] and [0909].

All limits can be disabled by setting them to zero.

“SINGLE”: When passing limit parameters [0903], [0905] or [0909] the start order will be given depending on the load/current of each diesel engine. If a generator passes the limit while the others do not a start order will be given.

“AVERAGE”: Start order given if average load/current of parameter [0903], [0905] or [0909] is passed. Average load/current means the average of load/current of all diesel engines running on the mains in one net.

0903. - 1. load limit :

First start limit for load-depending start of an additional diesel engine

0904. - delay : Delay time for first start limit parameter [0903]

0905. - 2.load limit :

Second start limit for load-depending start of an additional diesel engine

BACK EXIT

2434. - 1.load range < 730 kW

2435. - priority: 1

2436. - 2.load range < 1060 kW

2437. - priority: 2

2438. - 3.load range < 1790 kW

2439. - priority: 1 2

2440. - 4.load range < 2130 kW

2441. - priority: 2 3

2442. - 5.load range < 2850 kW

2443. - priority: 1 2 3

2444. - 6.load range < 60000 kw

2445. - priority: 1 2 3 4

2446. - 7.load range < 0 kW

2447. - priority: 1

2448. - 8.load range < 0 kW

2449. - priority: 1


0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

0-65535

ʺ1ʺ…ʺ1 2 3 4 5ʺ

Service Manual


0906. - delay : Delay time for second start limit parameter [0905]

0907. - low frequency :

Passage of a low frequency limit also starts a diesel engine. Coordinate with parameters

[2007] and [2010]

0908. - delay : Delay time for low frequency start limit parameter [0907]

0909. - high current :

Start limit for current-depending start of an additional diesel engine

0910. - delay : Delay time for current start limit parameter [0909]

0911. STOP - with priority :

Sequence for stop order.

“LOW”: Load-depending stop works in a sequence so that the aggregate with the lowest priority will be stopped first.

“HIGH”: Load-depending stop works in a sequence so that the aggregate with the highest priority will be stopped first.

0912. - block by event : By activating this event, load-depending stop of the diesel engines in the same main can be blocked.

0913. - remaining load : Stop limit for load-depending stop of operating diesel engine; the entered percentage limit is the load value remaining on the mains after disconnecting the diesel engine.

0914. - remaining curr. : Stop limit for current-depending stop of operating diesel engine; the entered percentage limit is the current value remaining on the mains after disconnecting the diesel engine. If zero is settled the limit check will be disabled.

0915. - delay : Delay time for current and load stop limit parameters [0913] and [0914]; note that both conditions must be fulfilled to start the delay. If only load stop is to be used the current limit [0914] must be set to zero. Both limits can be disabled by setting them to zero if PM-stop is not to be used. Current stop [0914] is only available in connection with load stop, never alone.

0916. Stop without run. down : If this parameter is set to “YES” the stopped generator will only open the CB (after load reduction) and than remain running.

0917. Block own start by event : By activating this event, the start of the own diesel engine through the power management system can be blocked. The blocking does not affect other start sources (e.g. blackout, start next…). A message will be displayed on the power management page if the blocking is active.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0918. Prio. shifter work count : If on any net node parameter [0918] is set and the work hours are reached by that node, the priorities will be rotated on every node in that net, regardless of parameter [0918] and a start next will be issued. The counting value (work hours) is stored novolatile. This function can be activated also on the priority page (MENU > SETTING > PRIORITY).

2430.LOAD RANGES - by event : Event switch for the second power management function; this switch affects only the parameters [2431] to [2449]. All devices in one net must have this switch enabled for activation!

2431. - change to upper range : If the actual net power changes from one range to a higher range the higher range will be taken as the valid range after this delay time has passed.

2432. - change to lower range : If the actual net power changes from one range to a lower range the lower range will be taken as the valid range after this delay time has passed.

2433. - load range hysteresis : This hysteresis is valid if the actual net power changes from one range to a higher range. The power must fall below this hysteresis in order to return to the previous (lower) range.

2434. - 1. load range < 2435. - priority :

to 2448. - 8. load range < 2449. - priority :

With this parameters up to eight ranges can be defined. Each range starts at the previous range and ends at the settled kW value. For every range up to five generators (identified in the net by the priorities) can be assigned, which should be connected to the BUS.

NOTE: The starting and stopping will begin when a new range becomes valid (after the delays parameters [2431] or [2432] are passed). The system will first start all the needed generators. After all the needed generators are connected to the BUS, the system will begin to stop the unnecessary generator. If one generator needed for the actual load range is not available (in MANUAL and stopped) the system will search for another generator with the same nominal power. If the search is without result the next stand-by generator will be started. The stopping is blocked in this case. The system will start or stop only generators which priority is defined in one of the load ranges (parameters [2435] … [2449]).

The stopping is automatically blocked if the PM stop is blocked (see parameter [0912]) or if a “big consumer request” is active in the net (see chapter 2.10.7). If parameter [2430] is settled to a value greater than zero supervision becomes active. This supervision checks if all the generators defined within the parameters [2435] … [2449] are available (in AUTOM.). In this case event [2430] will be active. Event [2431] will be active if parameter [2430] is set (to a value greater zero) and the generators needed for the actual range are all in AUTOM. This event can be used for alarming or to control processes (e.g. to switch to the classical PM if generators are not available).

Service Manual


2.10.3 Load sharing

The load sharing parameter includes the settings that regulate the load within the BUS section (see figures 2-37 and 2-38). The load sharing regulator works as a three-point controller. After a certain break time, the difference between the load set point and the actual measured load value will be calculated. With this load difference the pulse time for speed higher and lower will be calculated. The set point in the symmetrical load sharing mode for the load regulator is the average net load. The set point in the asymmetrical load sharing mode is parameter [0934]). If the load difference (set point to actual load) is lower then the dead band the load sharing regulator is blocked.

Figure 2-37 Load sharing-1

Figure 2-38 Load sharing-2

BACK EXIT

: 0

0926.- charactetristic : ON->OFF

0927.- break time : 3.0 sec

0928.- pulse time : 3.0 sec

0929.- deadband : 2.0 %

0930.- higher event

0931.- lower event

0932. ASYM. - switch by event : 501

0933.- characteristic : ON->OFF

0934.- setpoint : 80 %

0935.- analog input : OFF

0936.- range minimum : 40 %

0925. SYM. – switch by event

LOAD SHARING Setting range:

0-9999 (Evenet number)

ON->OFF/OFF->ON

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

--- (Event reminder)



ON->OFF/OFF->ON

0-200 %

OFF/CURR.1-4/Net CUR.1-4

0-200 %

BACK EXIT

0937. - range maximum : 90 %

0938. - next attempt : 60 sec

0939. Allowed load difference: 20.0 %

0940. - delay : 60 sec

0941. REGUL.- switch by event: 0

0942. - 2. break time : 0.0 sec

0943. - 2. pulse time : 0.0 sec

0944. ASY. Setpoint switch by: 0

2490. PTI mode – shaft gen. : 0

2491. - DG max.limit: 0 %

2492. - delay: 0 sec

2493.PULSE/PAUSE – diff.limit: 0.0 %

2494. - pulse time: 0.0 sec

2495. - pause time: 0.0 sec

2496. - block by : 0 ev.

2497.Allowed load diff.2.li. : 0.0 %

2498. - delay: 0 sec

LOAD SHARING Setting range:

0-200 %

0-9999 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec


0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec



0-9999 %

0-9999 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec


0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®



0925. SYM. - switch by event : ON/OFF switch of load sharing function; all devices in one net must have this switch enabled for activation!

0926. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of load sharing ON/OFF switch parameter [0925]:

“ON -> OFF”: If event of load sharing switch is active load sharing function will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If event of load sharing switch is active load sharing function will be switched on.

0927. - break time : Typical setting: 2 sec The cycle time for the calculation of the pulse times for speed adjustment during load sharing is set here. At the end of the break time, the load sharing controller will calculate and set the next pulse (see parameter [0928]).

0928. -pulse time : The pulse characteristic for POWER adjustment during load sharing is set here. This time defines the pulse time which corresponds to 100% POWER difference between POWER SET POINT Pset and ACTUAL POWER VALUE Pact. The “Calc. pulse (sec)” is modified by the POWER difference in the following way:

Calc. pulse(sec) = Parameter [0928] / 100 × ΔP(%)

with: Parameter [0928]: defined pulse time at 100% power difference, ΔP(%) = Pset(%) – Pact(%)

Example: Typical Setting: 100 sec Parameter [0928] = 100 sec means: If the POWER difference between POWER SET POINT and ACTUAL POWER VALUE is 100% a calc. pulse of 100 seconds will be set. If the POWER difference is 1% then a calc. pulse of 1 sec will be set. If the POWER difference is positive (Pset > Pact) the n > event [0930] will be activated for the calc. pulse time. If the POWER difference is negative (Pset < Pact) the n < event [0931] will be activated for the calc. pulse time.

0929. - deadband : Deadband of the regulator; if the load difference ΔP(%) = Pset(%) – Pact(%) (set point Pset minus actual measured load of the generator Pact) is under the deadband limit the regulator is idle.

0930. -higher event . Event for speed higher control; this event will be set by the system in case the pulse time of the regulator is active in combination with the demand to increase the speed. This event can be used to activate a function output.

0931. - lower event . Event for speed lower control; this event will be set by the system in case the pulse time of the regulator is active in combination with the demand to decrease the speed. This event can be used to activate a function output.

Service Manual


0932.AYM. - switch by event : Special application for load sharing regulator; ON/OFF switch of asymmetrical load sharing function; the function for this asymmetrical mode for the load sharing regulator can be switched on and off by setting this event. In the asymmetrical load sharing mode, the regulator uses a fixed-load set point parameter [0934], instead of the average net load. The asymmetrical load mode is allowed if a minimum of two generator sets feeding the BUS and the load limits of parameters [0936] and [0937] are not exceeded. In case of mains parallel operation parameter [0190], asymmetrical load sharing mode is always allowed.

0933. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of asymmetrical load sharing ON/OFF switch parameter [0932]:

“ON -> OFF”: If the event of the asymmetrical load sharing switch set in parameter [0932] is active asymmetrical load sharing function will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If the event of the asymmetrical load sharing switch set in parameter [0932] is active asymmetrical load sharing function will be switched on.

0934. - setpoint : Set point for the asymmetrical load sharing regulator; the range for this set point is 0-200% of the nominal load of the generator. This parameter can be changed also on the load page (Asymm. load).

0935. - analog input : Refer to chapter 2.5 to enable the selected analog input.

NOTE: If this parameter is enabled the setpoint of parameter [0934] is inactive.

“CURR.1 - CURR.4”: Analogous setpoint for the asymmetrical load sharing regulator; the set point for asymmetrical load limit can be set by the analogous input. One of the four analogous inputs of the basic unit can be used to modify the setpoint for the asymmetrical load sharing.

“Net CUR.1 - Net CUR.4”: The setpoint for this mode is zero and the actual value is the analog value. The analog value will be regulated to zero (so the analog value equals the regulator difference). The regulator direction for this mode is always UP (speed higher), in order that the generator should overtake the net power.

0936. - range minimum : 0937. - range maximum :

Minimum and maximum limit for the asymmetrical load sharing mode; if the asymmetrical load sharing is switched on Parameters [0932] and [0933] and if the load of the other generators feeding the same BUS is within the minimum and maximum range limit then the asymmetric mode will be allowed.

0938. - next attempt : If the asymmetrical load sharing mode is active and one of the other generators that is feeding the same BUS exceeds the limits of parameters [0936] and [0937] then the load sharing mode is switching from asymmetric to symmetrical load sharing mode. After the delay time set in parameter [0938], the load sharing regulator tries to switch again into the asymmetrical load sharing mode.

0939. Allowed load difference :

If the difference from the set point to the measured generator load exceeds this limit then

event [0939] will be activated (DNV load sharing supervision rule).

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0940. - delay : Delay time for parameter [0939]; use this event [0940] to activate an alarm channel.

0941.REGUL. - switch by event : With this function the load sharing regulator can be switched to another break and pulse time. This can be used to change the regulator characteristic for different operations.

0942. - 2. break time : This second break time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0941] is active (Refer to parameter [0927]).

0943. - 2. pulse time : This second pulse time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0941] is active (Refer to parameter [0928]).

0944. ASY. setpoint switch by : With this event switch it is possible to switch between the two setpoint sources (fixed setpoint parameter [0934] or an analog input parameter [0935]) for the asymmetrical load controller. If the event set by parameter [0944] is active and parameter [0935] is set the value from the analog input is the setpoint for the ASY.L.S. Otherwise parameter [0934] is the setpoint.

2490. PTI mode - shaft gen. : This event switch activates the PTI (Power Take In) mode. The PTI mode is a special Load control mode, which can be used to force a shaft generator on a ship to run as a motor, in order to make the ship faster. This switch must be activated only at the device which controls the shaft generator. To activate the PTI mode, all devices in one net must have also the main Load sharing switch enabled (see parameter [0925]). If this switch becomes active the reverse power protection (see chapter 3.6: ANSI 32) on the shaft generator is blocked and all other generators in the same net are running in parallel to the shaft generator the asym. L.S. switch (see parameter [0932]) has no function if the PTI mode is active. There are two modes possible if the PTI mode is active. The PTI mode always starts with the default mode 3:

“MODE 3”: The shaft generator is running as a motor with constant (asym.) reverse power. The setpoint is taken and calculated negative from the asym. load sharing. The other generators in the same net are running in parallel with variable (sym.) load sharing.

“MODE 4”: The shaft generator is running as a motor with variable reverse load sharing the power from the parallel generator with other consumers. The setpoint is the own load, so no regulation is active for the shaft generator. The other generators in the same net are running in parallel with constant (asym.) load. The setpoint is taken from the asym. load sharing.

There is an automatic switching between the two modes:

“MODE 3 -> MODE 4”: If one of the parallel generators exceeds the DG max. limit (see parameter [2491]) and the delay is passed (see parameter [2492]) all generators in the same net will switch to mode 4.

“MODE 4 -> MODE 3”: If the shaft generator exceeds the setpoint for the asym. load sharing and the delay is passed (see parameter [2492]) all generators in the same net will switch back to mode 3. The

Service Manual


actual power of the shaft generator and the setpoint for the asym. load sharing are taken as absolute values for the comparison.

NOTE: The asym. L.S. range supervision (see parameters [0936] and [0937]) is disabled if the PTI mode is active.

2491. - DG max.limit : The parallel generators will supervise this limit for switching from mode 3 to 4.

2492. - delay : Time delay for switching between the two modes

2493. PULSE/PAUSE - diff. limit : This function gives a constant pulse/pause time for the load control. If the actual controller difference exceeds the limit of parameter [2493] the PULSE/PAUSE -function gets active. The function works in all load sharing modes (SYM. and ASYM.). The function is switched off by setting parameter [2493] to zero.

2494. - pulse time :

This parameter defines the definite length of the pulse time for the load control, and in

addition for the load reduction control of the stopping phase (see parameter [0665]).

2495. - pause time :

This parameter defines the definite length of the pause time for the load control, and in

addition for the load reduction control of the stopping phase (sees parameter [0665]).

2496. - block by : This function can be blocked by an event number.

2497. Allowed load diff.2.lim. :

Second limit for the load difference. If the difference from the set point to the measured

generator load exceeds this limit, then event [2498] will be activated after the setted delay

has passed (DNV load sharing supervision rule). Event [2497] is never active. Only event

[2498] will be active on the device (not in the net) if the limit is reached and the delay is

passed.

2498. - delay : Delay time for parameter [2498]; use this event [2498] to activate an alarm channel.

NOTE: The Allowed load diff. functions (parameter [0939] or [2497]) are blocked, if “Load balance after start” (parameter [0189]) is active.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.4 Frequency controller

The frequency controller parameter contains the settings for regulating the frequency within the BUS section (see figure 2-39). The frequency controller works as a three-point controller. After a certain break time, the difference between the frequency set point and the actual measured frequency will be calculated. With this frequency difference, the pulse time for the speed control will be calculated. The set point for the frequency controller will be calculated from the frequency-load static given by the parameter: idle and full-load frequency. If the frequency difference (set point to actual measured frequency) is lower then the deadband limit then the frequency controller will be blocked.

Figure 2-39 Frequency controller


0945. - switch by event : ON/OFF switch of frequency control function; all devices in one net must have this switch enabled for activation!

0946. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of frequency control ON/OFF switch parameter [0945]:

“ON -> OFF”: If event of parameter [0945] is activated the frequency controller will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If event of parameter [0945] is activated the frequency controller will be switched on.

0947. - idle speed : 0948. - full load :

Set point for frequency control; either a constant frequency (for this, enter the same value in both parameters [0947] and [0948]) or a load depending speed droop can be entered in accordance with the speed controller of the diesel engine.

BACK EXIT

: 0


0947. - idle speed : 61.00 Hz

0948. - full load : 59.00 Hz

0949. - break time : 20.0 sec

0950. - pulse time : 100.0 sec

0951. - deadband : 0.2 %

0952. - higher event

0953. - lower event

0954.RANGE - maximum : 58.00 Hz

0955. - maximum : 62.00 Hz

0956.REGUL. - switch be event: 0

0957. - 2. break time : 0.0 sec

2420. - 2. pulse time : 0.0 sec

2421.REMOTE - higher event : 0

2422. - lower event : 0

2427.SETPOINT analog input : OFF

0945. – switch by event

FREQUENCY CONTROLLER Setting range:


ON->OFF/OFF->ON

0,00-999,99 Hz

0,00-999,99 Hz

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %



0,00-999,99 Hz

0,00-999,99 Hz


0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec



OFF/CURR.1-4

Service Manual


0949. - break time : Typical setting: 2 sec The cycle time for the calculation of the pulse times for speed adjustment during frequency controlling is set here. At the beginning of the break time, the frequency controller will calculate and set the next pulse (see parameter [0950]).

0950. - pulse time : The pulse characteristic for frequency adjustment during frequency controlling is set here. This time defines the pulse time which corresponds to 100% frequency difference. The calc. pulse is modified by the difference between the two frequency inputs in the following way:

Calc. pulse(sec) = Parameter [0950] / 100 × ΔF(%)

with: Parameter [0950]: defined pulse time at 100% frequency difference, ΔF(%): frequency difference between FEEDER and BUS1 in percent of

nominal

Example: Typical Setting: 100 sec Parameter [0950] = 100 sec means: If the frequency difference between FEEDER and BUS1 is 100% a calc. pulse of 100 seconds will be set. If the frequency difference is 0.5 Hz (1% at 50 Hz nominal-rated frequency) then a calc. pulse of 1 sec will be set. If the frequency difference is positive (FFEEDER > FBUS1) the n < event [0953] will be activated for the calc. pulse time. If the frequency difference is negative (FFEEDER < FBUS1) the n > event [0952] will be activated for the calc. pulse time.

0951. - deadband : Deadband of the controller; if the frequency difference (set point to actual measured frequency the generator) is under the deadband limit the controller will be blocked.

0952. - higher event . Event for speed higher control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator is active in combination with the demand to increase the speed. Use this event to activate a function output.

0953. - lower event .. Event for speed lower control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator is active in combination with the demand to decrease the speed. Use this event to activate a function output.

0954. RANGE - maximum : 0955. - minimum :

Operating range for frequency controller, load sharing and load reduction; if the frequency of the BUS exceeds the frequency range given by these parameters then these functions will be blocked.

0956. REGUL. - switch by event : With this function the frequency regulator can be switched to another break and pulse time. This can be used to change the regulator characteristic for different operations.

0957. - 2. break time : This second break time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0956] is active (Refer to parameter [0949]).

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2420. - 2. pulse time : This second pulse time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0956] is active (Refer to parameter [0950]).

2421. REMOTE - higher event : 2422. - lower event :

Over this events the speed can be remotely controlled (e.g. over binary inputs or communication).

2423. SETPOINT analog input : This parameter enables the frequency controller setpoint over an analog input. The analog input must be enabled and the measure type of the analog input must be set to [%] (see chapter 2.5), otherwise the setpoint will be calculated from P[0947] and P[0948]. The setpoint will be calculated from the nominal frequency parameter [0203]. The full and zero scale of the analog input will act as a limitation.

Service Manual


The figure 2-40 shows the frequency band, including the common limit values and the corresponding restriction, of the frequency controller. When a frequency static is defined (parameter [0947] for idle frequency and parameter [0948] for full-load frequency), then the set point of the controller will depend on the actual load, which is shown with the x-axis of the diagram.

Figure 2-40 Frequency control area

[2005]or

[0264]

f>>stopp

engine

overspeed Synchronizing

blocked

Parameter Frequency

[2002] f>Alarm

[ANSI 59_1

[0954] f>operating limit

[0947] f0

fNorminal[0203]

ffull load[0948]

f<operating limit[0955]

f<(PM)

start standby

diesel

[0908]

[2008] f<alarm

[ANSI 81_1]

f<preferential trip[0679]

f<BUS abnormal[0683]

[2011] f<<trip breaker

[ANSI 81_2]

Synchronisierung

blockiert

Frequency-static

(Droop)OFF with loard

reduction

100%

PW

Operating area for

frequency control

and load sharing

f>BUSabnormal[0682]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.5 Voltage regulator

The voltage regulator parameter contains the settings for regulating the voltage within the BUS section (see figure 2-41). The voltage regulator works as a three-point controller. After a certain break time the difference between the voltage set point and the actual measured voltage will be calculated. With this voltage difference, the pulse time for the voltage regulator will be calculated. If the voltage difference (set point to actual measured voltage) is lower then the dead-band limit then the voltage regulator will be blocked.

Figure 2-41 Voltage regulator


0958. - switch by event : ON/OFF switch of voltage regulator function; all devices in one net must have this switch enabled for activation!

0959. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of voltage regulator ON/OFF switch parameter [0958]:

“ON -> OFF”: If event of parameter [0958] is activated the voltage regulator will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If event of parameter [0958] is activated the voltage regulator will be switched on.

0960. - setpoint : Set point for voltage regulator

0961. - break time : Break time for the voltage regulator; the break time is the interval time for the controller. At the beginning of the break time, the pulse duration for the voltage control will be calculated and started.

BACK EXIT

: 1000


0960. - setpoint : 100.0 %



0963. - deadband : 2.0 %


0965. - lower event

0966.REMOTE - higher event : 0

0967. - lower event : 0

0968.SETPOINT analog input : OFF


VOLTAGE REGULATOR Setting range:


ON->OFF/OFF->ON

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %





OFF/CURR.1-4

Service Manual


0962. - pulse time : Pulse time of the voltage regulator; the pulse time depends on the difference between the set point and the actual measured voltage of the generator. The voltage control events [0964] and [0965] will be activated as long as the pulse time is running. The pulse time will be calculated as follows:

Pulse time = voltage difference * Parameter [0962] / 100

Set this parameter to the max. time the generator needs to reach the setpoint.

0963. - deadband : Deadband of the controller; if the voltage difference (set point to actual measured generator voltage) is under the deadband limit the controller will be blocked.

0964. - higher event . Event for voltage higher control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator is active in combination with the demand to increase the voltage of the generator. This event is used to activate a function output.

0965. - lower event . Event for voltage lower control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator is active in combination with the demand to decrease the voltage of the generator. This event is used to activate a function output.

0966. REMOTE - higher event : 0967. - lower event :

Over this events the voltage can be remotely controlled (e.g. over binary inputs, or communication).

0968. SETPOINT analog input : This parameter enables the voltage regulator setpoint over an analog input. The analog input must be enabled and the measure type of the analog input must be set to [%], otherwise parameter [0960] will be taken as the valid setpoint. The setpoint will be calculated from the nominal voltage parameter [0201]. The full and zero scale of the analog input works as a limitation.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 2-42 shows the voltage band, including the common limit values and the corresponding restriction of the voltage regulator.

Figure 2-42 Voltage regulator area

[1606] U>>trip breaker

[ANSI 59_2] Synchronizing

blocked[0684] U>abnormal

[1602] U>Alarm

[ANSI 59_1

[0201] UN

[1102]

[0685]

U<alarm

[ANSI 27_1]

U<abnormal

[1104] f<<trip breaker

[ANSI 27_2]

Synchronizing

blocked

Operating area for

voltage regulator

Parameter Voltage

Service Manual


2.10.6 Power factor controller

The parameters of the power factor contain the settings for balancing the reactive power load within the BUS section (see figure 2-43). The power factor controller works as a three-point controller. After a certain break time, the difference between the power factor set point and the actual measured power factor will be calculated. With this power factor difference, the pulse time for voltage higher and lower control will be calculated. The set point for the power factor regulator is the average net reactive power when the generators are operating in symmetrical load sharing mode. When the generators are in the asymmetrical load sharing mode, the set point for the power factor regulation is fixed by the setting of parameter [0979]. If the power difference (set point to actual power factor) is lower then the deadband then power factor control is blocked.

Figure 2-43 Power factor controller


0970. SYM. - switch by event : ON/OFF switch of power factor control function; all devices in one net must have this switch enabled for activation!

0971. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of power factor control ON/OFF switch parameter [0970]:

“ON -> OFF”: If the switch event of parameter [0970] turns to active power factor control function will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If the switch event of power factor control turns to active power factor control function will be switched on.

0972. - break time : Break time for the power factor controller; the break time is the interval time for the controller. At the beginning of the break time, the pulse duration for the power factor control will be calculated and started.

BACK EXIT

: 0




0974. - deadband : 2.0 %


0976. - lower event

0977.ASYM - switch by event: 0


0979. - setpoint : 0.80 cap

0980.Controller condition : CAP

0981.Activation current limit : 0 %


POWER FACTOR CONTROLLER Setting range:


ON->OFF/OFF->ON

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %




ON->OFF/OFF->ON

0,00-9,99 cap

CAP/IND

0-100 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0973. - pulse time : Pulse time of the power factor controller; the pulse time depends on the difference between the set point and the actual measured power factor of the generator. The voltage control events [0975] and [0976] will be activated as long as the pulse time is running. Voltage control event [0975] is to increase the voltage (increase the ind. load) and event [0976] to decrease the voltage (increase the capacitive load). The pulse time will be calculated as follows:

Pulse time = power factor difference * Parameter [0973] / 100

Set this parameter to the max. time the generator needs to reach the nominal voltage.

0974. - deadband : Deadband of the controller; if the power factor difference (set point to actual measured power factor of the generator) is under the deadband limit the controller will be blocked.

0975. - higher event . Event for voltage higher control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the controller is active in combination with the demand to increase the voltage. This event should be used to activate a function output. See parameter [0980] to invert this event.

0976. - lower event . Event for voltage lower control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the controller is active in combination with the demand to decrease the voltage. This event should be used to activate a function output. See parameter [0980] to invert this event.

0977. ASYM. - switch by event : Special application for power factor controller; ON/OFF switch of asymmetrical power factor function; the function for this asymmetrical mode for the power factor controller can be switched on and off by activating this event. In the asymmetrical mode the power factor controller uses a fixed power factor set point parameter [0979], instead of the average power factor of the net. The asymmetrical PF mode is allowed if at minimum two generator sets feed the BUS.

0978. - characteristic : Switch characteristic of asymmetrical power factor ON/OFF switch parameter [0977]:

“ON -> OFF”: If event of asymmetrical power factor turns to active asymmetrical power factor function will be switched off.

“OFF -> ON”: If event of asymmetrical power factor turns to active asymmetrical load power factor function will be switched on.

0979. - setpoint : Set point for the asymmetrical power factor controller; the range for this set point is 0-100, which is equal to a power factor of 0.00-1.00 (ind). This parameter can be changed also on the load page (Asym. PF).

0980. Controller condition : This parameter defines the regulator direction of the power factor controller (both the symmetrical and the asymmetrical). It simply inverts the output events [0975] and [0976].

0981. Activation current limit : With this parameter a activation limit for the sym. and the asym. controller can be set. The limit refers to the measured generator average current. The other nodes will continue regulating without the deactivate node. This parameter can be disabled by setting it to zero.

Service Manual


2.10.7 Big consumer request (BCR)

Within the power management function a load controller is available to manage big consumer requests (see figure 2-44). The load controller parameters contain the settings for the request and the control and the release of big consumers within the same BUS section. A maximum of 14 big consumers are managed by one device. After the request of a big consumer, the system checks the spinning reserve (valid load) of the corresponding net. Depending on the value of the spinning reserve, the load controller will start another diesel aggregates or release the big consumer directly. As long as the big consumer request is active, load depending stop of the power management will be blocked.

Figure 2-44 Big consumer request (BCR)-1


BACK EXIT

: 551

0985. - requested load : 655 kW

0986. - analog feedback: OFF

0987. - reseved :

0988. REQUEST 2 by event : 313



0991. - reserved :




0984. REQUEST 1 by event

BIG CONSUMER REQUEST (BCR) Setting range:


0-65000 kW

OFF/CURR.1-4


0-65000 kW

OFF/CURR.1-4


0-65000 kW

OFF/CURR.1-4

BACK EXIT

0995. - reserved :




0999. - reserved :






2375. - requested : 0 kW



0-65000 kW

OFF/CURR.1-4


0-65000 kW


0-65000 kW


0-65000 kW

Service Manual

SYMAP®



The load controller of the system operates in the following way: After a consumer request, the load

controller evaluates the load of the BUS section, in which the consumer has been requested.

Depending on the load situation, the load controller will release the big consumer directly or after it

has started one or more engines.

The following parameter description refers to Big Consumer Request 1, since each consumer

requests (1-14) have similar parameters with the exception of the event numbers.

The Big Consumer Requests 5-14 have no analog feedbacks.

Release events for Big Consumer Requests 1-4: event numbers: 984,988,992,996. Release events for Big Consumer Requests 5-14: even event numbers: 2370 – 2388.

Not available events for Big Consumer Requests 1-4: event numbers: 986,990,994,998.

Not available events for Big Consumer Requests 5-14: odd event numbers: 2371 – 2389.


0984. REQUEST 1 by event : Request load-depending connection to Big Consumer 1; select event number (normally a function input) and via it, enter request; the event must be active steadily until the big consumer has been switched on. Should the signal remain on at the input, diesel stop will be blocked. (Use for bow thrusters operation.)

0985. - requested load : Enter power of Consumer 1; if there is sufficient reserve power event [0984] will be set without a delay. If there isn’t sufficient power one or more diesel engines will be started. If after switching on the additional diesel engines sufficient power becomes available event [0984] will be set after the load balancing delay time (set with parameter [0189]). Event [0984] should be put on an output relay. If the power is not available event [0986] will be activated (for alarm).

BACK EXIT






2381. - requested lead : 0 kW










0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

0-9999 Event number

0-65000 kW

Service Manual


0986. - analog feedback : Load state of big consumer during operation; via an analogous input, the load state of the big consumer (actual load referring to nominal load) can be sent to the load controller. With this additional information, the load controller can reserve the required load at the BUS. If the reserved load of the big consumer is higher than the valid load within the BUS section one or more engines will be started, if available. This additional function of the load controller works when the request event [0984] is active.

Use one of the four analogous inputs of the basic unit of the system (Analogue in 4-20 mA). Example: If a 4-20 mA input is selected then an analogous signal of 4 mA means, that no

power of the consumer is in use. 20 mA means, the total power of the consumer parameter [0985] is in use.

NOTE: The feedbacks can be activated with the related parameters [0986], [0990], [0994] or [0998]. The measure type of the selected analog input must be set to "%" or "Load [%]". The reserved power will be calculated from the actual analog input value if the request gets released.

Example for request 1: The requested load (parameter [0985]) is 500 kW. The actual analog input value is 10 %. So, the actual reserved power for this request is 450 kW.

The system collects the feedbacks of all released requests. If another request gets active, the reserved power for all previously released requests are taken into account. This is done by reducing the actual spinning reserve by the amount of all present reserved power for all released requests with analog feedbacks. The spinning reserve display on the PM page shows this reduced value.

The PM load depending starting (only the average load limits) and stopping (only the stop load limit) are also affected by active analog feedbacks. This functions uses a modified actual net load if there are active analog feedbacks in the net. This modified actual net load will be calculated by adding the present reserved power for all released requests to the actual net load. The modified actual net load is not shown on the display, or transferred via communication.

Big consumer requests with analog feedbacks will not block the PM stop condition (parameter [0913])! The present reserved power will be shown on the PM page (same line as NET kW) if there are active analog feedbacks in the net.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.8 Blackout

The blackout module offers a powerful supervisory system, which is capable of managing all

emergency situations in one net (see figure 2-46).

Figure 2-47 Blackout


0230. BUS1 - blackout by : Blackout 1 will be recognized if this event is active (e.g. function input).

0231. - mains monitor : Blackout recognition via mains monitor; the mains monitor supervises the BUS1 voltage when this parameter is set to SINGLE or REDUNDANT. Redundancy means that all devices in one net must recognize the BUS1 voltage limit.

0232. - voltage limit : If parameter [0231] is enabled and one of the 3 lines of BUS1 voltage is lower than the limit of parameter [0232] then the mains monitor condition is fulfilled and event [0232] will be set.

0233. - start delay : The delay will start if the blackout event condition [0230] or the mains monitor condition [0232] occurs. If the delay is passed blackout BUS1 start condition is fullfiled and event [0233] will be set.

BACK EXIT

: 0

0231. - mains monitor : REDUNDANT

0232. - voltage limit : 40.0 %

0233. - start delay : 2.0 sec

0234. - start diesel : NEXT

0235. - stop enable by : 2957

0236. - stop delay : 0 sec

0237. BUS 2 – blackout : 0

0238. - mains monitor : ON

0239. - voltage limit : 40.0 %

0240. - start delay : 2.0 sec

0241. - stop enable by : 2957

0242. - stop delay : 0 sec

0243. STOP BUS 1,2 blocked by : 522

0244. STOP preliminary output

0245. START BUS 1 blocked by : 0

0246. START BUS 2 blocked by : 0

0230. BUS 1 – blackou by

BLACHOUT Setting range:

0-9999 Event number

OFF/SINGLE/REDUDUNTDANT

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

ALL/NEXT/OWN/SEQUENCE

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 sec

0-9999 Event number

OFF/ON

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 sec

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

Service Manual


0234. - start diesel : The starting mode can be set by this parameter. All devices in one net should have this parameter set to the same value. There are several possibilities according to the mode:

“ALL”: All stand-by diesels will start and close their CBs.

“NEXT”: The first stand-by diesel will start.

“OWN”: The own diesel (if in standby) will start.

“SEQUENCE”: All stand-by diesels will start but only the generator with the highest priority will close its CB. After that, the other generator will cancel the startphase and remain running. If the first generator fails to close its CB within 3 seconds, the generator with the next highest priority has the permission to close its CB.

NOTE: If more than one generator is started (by any source) and no CB is closed in the net a special interlock function becomes active. This function assures that only one generator at the same time has the permission to close the CB. The permission time is limited to 3 seconds. The other generators will remain waiting with blocked synchronic-events [1023],[1053] and[1083].

0235. - stop enable by : 0236. - stop delay :

The stop delay gets activated if parameter [0235] is activated, the diesel is running and Blackout 1 is inactive. If the delay is passed and if Automatic has been selected and if event [0243] is inactive then the “own” diesel will be stopped.

0237. BUS2 - blackout by : Blackout 2 will be recognized if this event is active (e.g. function input).

0238. - mains monitor : Blackout recognition via mains monitor; the mains monitor supervises the BUS2 voltage if parameter [0238] is switched to ON.

0239. - voltage limit : If parameter [0238] is activated and one of the three lines of BUS2 voltage is lower than the limit of parameter [0239] then the mains monitor condition will be fulfilled and event [0239] will be set.

0240. - start delay : The delay will start if the Blackout Event Condition [0237] or the Mains Monitor Condition [0239] occurs. If the delay is over event [0240] will be set and the device will start the “own” diesel (if in stand-by).

0241. - stop enable by : 0242. - stop delay :

The stop delay gets activated if event [0241] is activated, the diesel is running and if Blackout 2 is inactive. If the delay is over and Automatic and event [0243] is inactive, the device will stop the “own” diesel.

0243. STOP BUS1/2 blocked by : The stopping of Blackout 1 or 2 can be blocked with this event.

0244. STOP preliminary output . The event [0244] will be activated if the Delay [0236] or [0242] is passed and the stop is blocked by event [0243] or manual mode.

0245. START BUS1 blocked by : The starting of Blackout 1 can be blocked with this event.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0246. START BUS2 blocked by : The starting of Blackout 2 can be blocked with this event.

NOTE: For an automatic stop after blackout, it is advisable to use the event [2957] (blackout start source) on parameters [0235] or [0241], because the event [2957] will be set on blackout start and will remain active until the engine is stopped by any source.

Service Manual


For details related to the blackout function, refer to the figure 2-47.

Figure 2-48 Blackout logic

P[2031]: SINGEL/

REDUDANT

³1

&

P[2032]:

Limit erreicht

P[0230]: by event

E [0233]

E[0245] (start

blocked by)

&

&

START OWNAUTOM.

&

P[0234]: ALL/NEXT/SEQUENCE1

P[0234]: OWN

&

P[0234]: ALL/SEQUENCE

&P[0234]: NEXT

≥1 One node by P[0230]

All nodes with REDUDANT: Limit reached

One node with SINGEL Limit

START NEXT

STANDBY

START ALL

STADBYS

All net nodes

Master

CAN 1 Bus

BUS 1

P[0238]: ON

≥1

&

P[2039]:

Limit reached

P[0237]: by event

E [0240]

2

&

AUTOM.

E[0246] (start blocked by)

START OWN

BUS 2

P[0234]: OWN&

1

P[0234]: ALL/NEXT&

No net node with

“Blackou 1“

≥1

&

Enigine running

E[0235] (stop enable by)

P [0236]&

AUTOM.

E[0243] (stop blocked by)

³1

E[0241] (stop enable by

Engine running

2

P [0242]&

AUTOM.

³1

STOP OWN

E[0244]

Preliminary

Output event

Stop 1/2

&

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.9 Engine control

The diesel control unit of the system controls and supervises the starting and stopping sequences of the aggregate. The diesel control group contains the general parameter for speed adjustment and prelubricating interval (see figure 2-48).

Figure 2-49 Engine control


0260. Engine control : Main switch for engine control; by setting this parameter to “ON”, the engine control function (starting and stopping of the aggregate) will be activated.

0261. SPEED - nominal : Nominal speed of the engine; the nominal speed of the engine should be given in revolutions per minute (RPM).

0262. - ignition : Ignition speed limit; the ignition speed limit will be used within the starting phase to switch off the start valve when the speed signal exceeds this limit.

0263. - running up : Running-up speed limit; the running-up speed limit will be used within the starting phase to recognize that the engine is ready to take load.

0264. - overspeed : Overspeed limit; the overspeed limit can be used for the alarm system. This event number should be used to activate an alarm channel.

BACK EXIT

: ON

0261. SPEED - nomina : 1800 rpm

0262. - ignition : 15.0 %

0263. - running up : 85.0 %

0264. - overspeed : 150.0 %

0265. TACHO - input : OFF

0266. PICKUP – input : ON

0267. – impuls / rev. : 4

0268. LIMITS – n max. diff. : 10.0 %

0269. - n high limit : 105.0 %

0270. - n low limit : 95.0 %

0271. PRELUBRICATE -pulsetime: 20 sec

0272. -breaktime: 500 sec

0273. Alarmblocking delay : 5.0 sec

0274. ENGINE – speed preset : 0.0 %

0275. - activate by : 0 ev.

0276. MDEC disable Cyl.Cutout: 0 ev.

0277. Ignition by event : 0 ev.

0260. Diesel control

DIESEL CONTROLSetting range:

OFF/ON

0-99999 rpm

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

OFF/CURR.1-4

OFF/ON/IGNITION/BIN.INP.

0-9999 Event number

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

0-9999 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

Service Manual


0265.TACHO - input : Analogous input for speed measurement; if a tacho generator gives the speed signal of the engine one of the four analogous inputs of the basic unit should be used. The adjustment setting of the analogous inputs is done within the parameter group “analog inputs” (see chapter 2.5).

0266. PICKUP - input : 0267. - impuls /rev. :

Pick-up input for speed measurement; if a pick-up system provides the speed signal parameter [0266] should be set to “ON”. The number of impulses the pick-up system recognizes during one revolution has to be set with parameter [0267]. If parameter [0266] is set to “IGNITION” and at the pickup input is a high-signal the device will take the limit from parameter [0262] as the pickup speed value. The pickup input can be used as a common binary input (Event [0266]) if parameter [0266] is set to “BIN.INP”.

0268. LIMITS - n max. diff. : The speed signal can be measured via three speed channels: tacho generator, pick-up system and via the generator voltage signal. Depending on which speed measuring system is active, the speed signals of the respective channel are compared among themselves. When the measured speed signal differs more than this limit, event [0268] will be activated. Use this event number to activate a alarm.

The following two parameters are speed limit events. These events will be activated when

the speed signal fulfills the corresponding conditions. They can be used for alarming.

0269. - n high limit : High speed limit; event [0269] will be activated if the speed signal is higher than this limit.

0270. - n low limit : Low speed limit; event [0270] will be activated if the speed signal is lower than this limit.

0271. PRELUBRICATE - pulsetime : 0272. - breaktime :

Prelubricating interval; for prelubricating the engine a pulse and a break time can be defined. During the prelubricating pulse time, event [0271] is activated. This event has to be used to activate prelubrication via a function output. After the pulse time is passed, the break time will be started. Prelubrication works only in automatic mode. If the mode is started from manual to automatic then prelubricating process will be introduced and started with the pulse time. The following events introduce the prelubrication process.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0273.Alarmblocking delay : For diesel engines it is necessary to block some alarm channels which are related to engine warnings. The alarm blocking event [0273] will be activated immediately when the speed signal falls below the ignition limit or if the running down phase event [0658] is active or the fixed delay event [0659] is active (see figure 2-49). If the speed signal reaches the ignition limit again event [0273] will be inactive after the setted delay is over.

E[0262]n > ignition

E[0658]Running down rime

P[0273]

E[0659]Stopp fixed delay

³1

E[0273]

Figure 2-50 Alarm blocking logic

0274. ENGINE - speed preset : 0275. - activate by :

The speed will be set to parameter [0274] (in %) if the event set by parameter [0275] gets active. If MDEC is active the speed (analog speed) will be sent to the MDEC unit for the fixed time of 2 sec. After the 2 sec the speed demand will be reset to UP/DOWN. The preset is disabled if parameter [0274] = 0.

0276. MDEC disable Cyl.Cutout : If the event is active the Cyl.Cutout 1+2 of the MDEC Controller are both disabled.

0277. Ignition by event : If the event is active the ignition speed is reached. Parameter [0266] must be set to “OFF” if this parameter [0277] is in use.

Service Manual


2.10.10 Starting phase

The parameters of the starting phase contain the settings for control and supervision of the engine during the starting phase (see figure 2-50).

Figure 2-51 Starting phase

The starting sequence includes a maximum of five phases (see also figure 2-50):

1. Preglowing time The first phase of the start procedure is used to preglow the engine. This phase can be shortened by an event.

2. Start time After preglowing the engine, the start time is activated. During this period the start valve will be activated to run up the engine. This phase can be shortened by reaching the ignition speed. After reaching the ignition speed, the start valve will be reset.

3. Running-up time The running-up time is a supervision time. If during this period the engine can not reach the running-up speed and minimum voltage limit a fail event will be issued.

4. Ready-to-take-load time After reaching running-up conditions, the ready-to-take-load phase will be started. During this time the engine has to stabilize the speed before starting synchronization + or in case of blackout, the engine has to take the load immediately.

5. Synchronizing period During the synchronizing time, the speed and voltage controller try to synchronize the diesel generator to the BUS. In case both systems are synchronized, the circuit breaker on command will be issued.

BACK EXIT

: 4.0 sec

0631. - shorten by: 0

0632.START VALVE – max trials: 3

0633. - fuel valve: NO

0634. - at PRM=0 : NO

0635. - max time : 5.0 sec

0636. – BREAKTIME : 10.0 sec

0637.RUNNING UP – max time *: 20.0 sec

0638. – min volt. : 90.0 %

0639.READY TO TAKE LOAD time : 3.0 sec

0640.SYNCHRONIZING max time *: 120.0 sec

0641.Start next after 1 trial: NO

0642.Cancel if n > ignition : NO

0643.Cancel start by event : 0

0644.Start counter : 0

0645.All start trials in MANU: NO

0630.PREGLOWING - max time

DIESEL STARTING PHASE Setting range:

0,0-999,9 sec

0-9999

0-999

NO/YES

NO/YES

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

NO/YES/BLACKOUT/NO START

NO/YES

0-9999 Event number

0-65535

NO/YES

Service Manual

SYMAP®



0630. PREGLOWING - max time : Preglowing of the engine; this time defines the preglowing period of the engine. The starting phase of the aggregate begins with the preglowing period. After this period the starting valve will be set. If no preglowing time is required the time should be set to zero. If the preglowing time is running event [0630] will be set by the system. This event is used to activate a function output.

0631. - shorten by :

The preglowing period (see parameter [0630]) can be interrupted by an event. If the event

(defined with this parameter) is active the preglowing period will be interrupted and the start

valve will be activated.

0632. START VALVE - max trials : Number of start attempts; if the engine speed is below the ignition limit the start procedure will be separated into three phases: 1. preglowing, 2. the start time (start valve) and if the engine has not reached the ignition speed, 3.the break time. The number of starts to be attempted should be entered here. At the end of the last unsuccessful start attempt, a start fault alarm will be displayed.

0633. - fuel valve :

If a fuel oil valve is in use this parameter has to be set to “ON.” During start or operation of

the diesel engine, the event [0660] is always active. This event becomes inactive within the

stopping phase or if the engine is stopped (see figure 2-56).

E[0262]n > ignition

Startphase

Stopphase

≥1

E[0660]

&

Figure 2-52 Fuel oil valve logic

0634. - at RPM=0 : When the engine speed reaches 0 rpm the start valve can be set.

“YES”: Start process is initialised here when the speed = 0. With this, break time may be prolonged (for electro starters).

“NO”: Start process is initialized at the end of break time even if the diesel engine still operates below ignition speed.

0635. - max time : Maximum energizing time of start relay during start phase; use event [0635] to set the function output for the start relay.

0636. - BREAKTIME : Break time between start attempts during start phase

0637. RUNNING UP - max time * : 0638. - min volt. :

Running-up supervision time; the maximum supervising time allowed between rising above ignition speed and reaching running-up speed should be entered here. The diesel generator is run up if the speed signal is above the running-up limit parameter [0263] and the voltage of the generator is higher than the minimum voltage of parameter [0638].

Service Manual


0639. READY TO TAKE LOAD time : After the diesel generator reaches the run-up conditions (see parameters [0637] and [0638]) the ready-to-take-load delay will operate. This time delay is used to stabilize the speed of the engine. After this delay time the next phase of the starting procedure will be introduced (e.g. switch on the synchronizing unit).

0640. SYNCHRONIZING max time * : Synchronizing supervision time; if the diesel generator is ready to take load event [0640] will be activated. With this event one of the 3 synchronizing units can be activated. To supervise the synchronizing phase, a time limit can be entered. If after this time the circuit breaker is not connected to the BUS a start failure will be issued.

0641. Start next after 1.trial :

“NO”: After the last unsuccessful start attempt (see parameter [0632]), the next available diesel engine of the same BUS section will be started.

“YES”: After the first unsuccessful start attempt (see parameter [0632]), the next available diesel engine of the same BUS section will be started.

“BLACKOUT”: After the first unsuccessful start attempt the next generator will be started if Blackout 1 or 2 (event [0233] or [0240]) is active on that device.

“NO START”: no diesel engine will be started in any cases.

0642. Cancel if n > ignition : With this parameter an additional condition for the start phase cancellation can be defined:

“NO”: cancel the start phase if the CB is closed

“YES”: cancel the start phase if the CB is closed and if the speed reaches the ignition limit

0643. Cancel start by event : If this event is active any start will be cancelled or blocked.

0644. Start counter : Counts the start valves (event [0635]); this counter is also shown on the Diesel overview page.

0645. All start trials in MANU : Only one start trial will be executed (without start failure supervision) if this parameter is set on “NO” and a start command is given over the front key and the device is in “MANUAL”. Otherwise all trials are issued (with start failure supervision).

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.11 Stopping phase

The parameters of the stopping phase include the settings for control and supervision of the engine

during the stopping phase (see figure 2-52).

Figure 2-53 Stopping phase

The stopping sequence includes at maximum four phases (see also figure 3-52):

1. Alarm stop delay This phase will be used to start and connect another diesel aggregate to the BUS before the engine is stopped.

2. Off with load reduction Within this phase, the load of the diesel generator is reduced with the speed lower signal. If the load is under a certain limit the circuit breaker will be disconnected.

3. Running-down phase The running-down phase is a supervision period. During this period, the speed of the engine is reduced via the stop valve output. If the speed signal does not fall below the ignition speed during that time an alarm event will be issued.

4. Stop delay fixed time During the stop delay fixed time the event for the stop valve will be set. This event is used to ensure that the engine reaches zero speed.


0650. Stop abort if last gen. : Block stop order supervision; this parameter should be set to “YES,” if you want to block the stop order when the corresponding diesel generator is the last aggregate loading the BUS. Stop orders introduced by alarms with any priority and the immediate stop order from the keyboard or by event [0661] will stop the engine regardless of this parameter.

BACK EXIT

: NO

0651.ALARM DELAY - max time: 120.0 sec

0652.LOAD REDUCT. – by event : 511

0653. - loadlimit: 5.0 %

0654. - max time : 20.0 sec

0655. - CB OFF

0656.COOLING DOWN – time : 120.0 sec

0657. – if alarm : NO

0658.RUNNING DOWN – max time : 30.0 sec

0659.FIXED DELAY - time : 10.0 sec

0660.Stop valve event

0661.Emergency stop by event : 517 ev.

0662.Stop interlock by event : 519 ev.

0663.Cancel stop by event : 0 ev.

0664.No abort of stophase : 0 ev.

0665.LOAD RED. Pulse/pause by: 0 ev.

0666.No cooling down phase : 0 ev.

0650.Stop abort if last gen

DIESEL STARTING PHASESetting range:

YES/ON

0,0-999,9 sec

0-9999

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

Event number

0,0-999,9 sec

YES/ON

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 sec

Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

Service Manual


0651.ALARM DELAY - max time : Stop delay time; if an alarm (see chapter 1.3) with priority 2, 6, 8 or 9 introduces a stop of the engine the beginning of the stopping phase can be delayed with this delay time. This period of time is used to start and connect another diesel generator to the BUS. The alarm delay maximum time can be shortened if another diesel generator is connected to the BUS before this time has passed.

0652. LOAD REDUCT. - by event : The load reduction phase will be introduced automatically within the stopping phase. If another event activates the load reduction function (e.g. off-switch at the front door of the cubical) then the event number should be set here. Event [0652] is also the speed lower event and can be used on an binary output.

0653. - loadlimit : Load limit for load reduction function; during the off with load reduction phase, the speed lower event will be set by the system until the load of the diesel generator is below this limit. Then the circuit breaker will be disconnected.

0654. - max time : Maximum time for load reduction phase; if the load reduction phase is not finished within this supervision time, a failure event will be issued.

0655. - CB OFF . Event for circuit breaker OFF command; this event number can be used to give out the circuit breaker OFF command.

0656. COOLING DOWN - time : If the load reduction phase is finished the cooling down of the engine will be introduced. A period of time in which the engine should cool down with nominal speed should be entered here.

0657. - if alarm : If an alarm with priority 2, 6 or 8 activates the stopping of the engine the user can decide whether or not the cooling down period of the engine will also be activated.

0658. RUNNING-DOWN - max time : Running-down supervision time; a supervision period in which the speed of the engine should fall below the ignition speed limit while the stop valve is active should be entered here.

0659. FIXED DELAY - time : Stop delay fixed time; if the speed signal is lower then the ignition speed limit the stop delay fixed time starts. During this period the stop valve will be activated.

0660. Stop valve event . Event number for stop valve; this event number is used to activate a function output that is connected to the stop valve (relay).

0661. Emergency stop by event : If the event (e.g. a function input) becomes active an emergency stop will be introduced.

0662. Stop interlock by event : If the event (e.g. a function input) is active all stop sources will be blocked (even alarm stops), with the exception of emergency stops by key or by event [0661].

0663. Cancel stop by event : If this event is active any stop (even emergency stops) will be cancelled or blocked.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


0664. No abort of stopphase : An interruption of any stop phase (through any start source) is not possible if the event set under parameter [0664] is active. Furthermore all starts are blocked.

0665. LOAD RED. pulse/pause by : The pulse/pause function for the load reduction phase can be enabled with this event switch. The pulse/pause times will be taken from the Load sharing parameters [2494] and [2495] (must be greater zero!). The function works in all Load reduction modes (within the stop phase, or “by event”). Event [0652] (n<) will be filtered by the event history.

0666. No cooling down phase : If active, no cooling down phase will be introduced.

Service Manual


Figure 2-54 Starting procedure of the diesel generator

AL

AR

M B

LO

CK

ING

OP

ER

AT

OIN

/

SY

NC

HR

ON

I. W

OR

KIN

G

PR

EG

LO

W T

IME

[630]

RU

NN

ING

UP

SU

PE

RV

ISE

D T

IME

(2)

[637]

ST

AR

T T

IME

(1)

[635]

WA

ITIN

G F

OR

TA

KE

LO

AD

TIM

E

[659]

SY

NC

HR

ON

ISIN

G S

UP

ER

VIS

ED

TIM

E (

2)

[640]

AL

AR

M B

LO

CK

ING

R

EL

EA

SE

RA

TE

D

SP

EE

D / V

OL

TA

GE

IM

ME

DIA

TE

ST

AR

T

ST

AR

T

SP

EE

D / %

OV

ER

SP

EE

D [

26

4]

NO

MIN

AL

RA

TE

D S

PE

ED

10

0%

[2

61

]

RU

NN

ING

UP

SP

EE

D [

26

3]

IGN

ITIO

N S

PE

ED

[2

62

]

EV

EN

TS

(O

UT

PU

TS

):

t (T

IME

)

[63

5]

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y S

TO

P

ST

OP

VA

LV

E

BO

OS

TE

R V

AL

VE

S

PR

EG

LO

W

FU

EL

VA

LV

E

ST

AR

T V

AL

VE

BR

EA

KE

R O

N N

EX

T D

IES

EL

BR

EA

KE

R O

FF

PR

EL

UB

RIC

AT

ION

FE

ED

BA

CK

BR

EA

KE

R O

N

n<

(S

PE

ED

LO

WE

R)

[63

5]

[63

0]

[63

5]

[66

0]

[66

1]

[xx

x]

[65

5]

[27

1]

[11

3]

[65

2]

[27

3]

DIS

PL

AY

IN

DIC

AT

ION

S

TA

RT

VA

LV

E

(BR

EA

K T

IME

) P

RE

GL

OW

ING

R

EA

DY

TO

TA

KE

LO

AD

R

UN

NIN

G U

P

AL

L N

OT

ES

IN

BR

AC

KE

TS

AR

E R

EF

ER

ING

TO

TH

E P

AR

AM

ET

ER

RE

CO

RD

OF

SY

MA

P®

2)

EV

EN

T I

S A

CT

IVE

AS

LO

NG

AC

TIV

E A

S T

HE

BR

EA

KE

R IS

CL

OS

ED

1)

A. C

. B

. O

FF

WIT

H L

OA

D R

ED

UC

TIO

N IS

AS

LO

NG

AC

TIV

E A

S T

HE

BR

EA

KE

R IS

SW

ITC

HE

D O

FF

DIE

SE

L

OP

ER

AT

ION

BR

EA

KE

R

ON

TIM

E F

OR

RE

LE

AS

E A

LA

RM

BL

OC

KIN

G

[273]

~ ~

3)

3)

GE

NE

RA

TO

R V

OL

TA

GE

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 2-55 Stopping procedure of the diesel generator

AL

.2 S

TO

P D

EL

AY

TIM

E

[651]

OF

F W

ITH

LO

AD

RE

DU

CT

ION

[655]

CO

OL

ING

DO

WN

TIM

E

[656]

RU

NN

ING

DO

WN

SU

PE

RV

ISE

TIM

E (

2)

[658]

ST

OP

DE

LA

Y F

IXE

D T

IME

[659]

IMM

ED

IAT

E

ST

OP

BR

EA

KE

R

OF

F

DE

LA

YE

D

ST

OP

DE

LA

YE

D

AL

AR

M S

TO

P

SP

EE

D / %

OV

ER

SP

EE

D [

26

4]

NO

MIN

AL

RA

TE

D S

PE

ED

10

0%

[2

61

]

RU

NN

ING

UP

SP

EE

D [

26

3]

IGN

ITIO

N S

PE

ED

[2

62

]

EV

EN

TS

(O

UT

PU

TS

):

t (T

IME

)

[6

35

]

ST

OP

FIX

ED

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y S

TO

P

ST

OP

VA

LV

E

BO

OS

TE

R V

AL

VE

S

PR

EG

LO

W

FU

EL

VA

LV

ES

ST

AR

T V

AL

VE

BR

EA

KE

R O

N N

EX

T D

IES

EL

BR

EA

KE

R O

FF

PR

EL

UB

RIC

AT

ION

FE

ED

BA

CK

BR

EA

KE

R O

N

n<

(S

PE

ED

LO

WE

R)

AL

AR

M B

LO

CK

ING

[6

35

+ 6

37

]

[6

30

]

[6

35

]

[6

60

]

[6

61

]

[x

xx

]

[6

55

]

[2

71

]

[1

13

]

[6

52

]

[2

73

]

1)

2)

2)

DIS

PL

AY

IN

DIC

AT

ION

L

OA

D 1)

RE

DU

CT

ION

A

LA

RM

2 D

LE

AY

R

UN

NIN

G D

OW

N

CO

OL

ING

DO

WN

AL

L N

OT

ES

IN

BR

AC

KE

TS

AR

E R

EF

ER

ING

TO

TH

E P

AR

AM

ET

ER

RE

CO

RD

OF

SY

MA

P®

2)

EV

EN

T I

S A

CT

IVE

AS

LO

NG

AC

TIV

E A

S T

HE

BR

EA

KE

R IS

CL

OS

ED

1)

A. C

. B

. O

FF

WIT

H L

OA

D R

ED

UC

TIO

N IS

AS

LO

NG

AC

TIV

E A

S T

HE

BR

EA

KE

R IS

SW

ITC

HE

D O

FF

Service Manual


2.10.12 Preferential trip limits/Abnormal BUS condition

With the parameter group “preferential trip limits,” the conditions for non-essential consumer trip and abnormal BUS situation can be defined (see figure 2-55).

Figure 2-56 Preferential trip limits


Preferential trip settings [0670] to [0681]:

0670. HIGH CURRENT - 1. limit :

Setting of the first current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measured

current reaches this limit event [0670] will be activated.

0671. - delay : If event [0670] is active and this delay time is passed event [0671] will be activated and remains active as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0670] (including 1% hysteresis). This parameter should be used for the alarm controller.

0672. - 2. limit :

Setting of the second current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measured



0674. - 3. limit :

Setting of the third current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measured


BACK EXIT

: 70.0 %

0671. - delay : 30.0 sec

0672. – 2. limit : 75.0 %

0673. - delay : 15.0 sec

0674. - 3. limit : 80.0 %

0675. - delay : 5.0 sec

0676. – 4. limit : 0.0 %

0677. – delay : 0.0 sec

0678. LOW FREQUENENCY - limit : 0.0 %

0679. - delay : 0.0 sec

0680. HIGH LOAD - limit : 0.0 %

0681. - delay : 0.0 sec

0682. BUS1 ABNORM.- overfreq. : 51.50 Hz

0683. - underfreq : 48.50 HZ

0684. - overvolt. : 105.0 %

0685. - undervolt : 95.0 %

0686. - delay : 10.0 sec

0687. PREF.TRIP -check limits : NET

0670. HIGH CURRENT – 1. limit

PREFERTIAL TRIP LIMITSSetting range:

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,00-99,99 Hz

0,00-99,99 Hz

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

OWN/NET

Service Manual

SYMAP®



0676. - 4. limit :

Setting of the fourth current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measured



0678. LOW FREQUENCY - limit :

Setting of the low frequency limit event for preferential trip purpose; this limit will only be

checked if the CB is closed. If the actual measured frequency falls below this limit event

[0678] will be activated.

0679. - delay : If event [0678] is active and this delay time is passed event [0679] will be activated and remains active as long as the actual value exceeds the limit of parameter [0678] (including 0.1% hysteresis). This parameter should be used for the alarm controller.

0680. HIGH LOAD - limit :

Setting of the high load limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measured

power reaches this limit event [0680] will be activated.


0687. PREF.TRIP - check limits : This parameter is related to the limits [0670] to [0681], not to the abnormal BUS limits.

“OWN”: check only the own device

“NET”: check all devices in the same net

Abnormal BUS1 settings [0682] to [0686]:

0682. BUS1 ABNORM. - overfreq. :

Setting of the overfrequency limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual measured

BUS1 frequency reaches this limit event [0682] will be activated.

0683. - underfreq :

Setting of the underfrequency limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual

measured BUS1 frequency falls below this limit event [0683] will be set.

0684. - overvolt. :

Setting of the overvoltage limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual measured

BUS1 voltage reaches this limit event [0684] will be activated.

0685. - undervolt :

Setting of the under voltage limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual measured

BUS1 voltage falls below this limit event [0685] will be activated.

Service Manual


0686. - delay :

If one of the above conditions (events [0682] to [0685]) is active and this delay time is

passed then event [0686] will be activated. Use this event number for abnormal BUS alarm.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2.10.13 Additional limits

With these additional limits the user can define further events for his application (see figure 2-56). The time delays of these limits are not as exact as the delay time of the ANSI devices.

Figure 2-57 Additional limits


0280. OVERSPEED - limit :

Setting of an additional overspeed limit; if the actual measured speed signal exceeds this

limit event [0280] will be activated.

0281. - delay : If event [0280] is active and this delay time is passed event [0281] will be activated and remain active as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0280] (including 1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0282. OVERVOLTAGE - limit :

Setting of an additional overvoltage limit; if the actual measured voltage exceeds this limit,

event [0282] will be activated.


0284. OVERCURRENT - limit :

Setting of an additional over current limit; if the actual measured current exceeds this limit

event [0284] will be activated.

BACK EXIT

: 105.0 %

0281. - delay: 0.5 sec

0282. OVERVOLTAGE – limit: 115.0 %

0283. - delay: 2.5 sec

0284. OVERCURRENT - limit: 90.0 %

0285. - delay: 2.5 sec

0286. OVERLOAD (OWN) – limit: 95.0 %

0287. – delay: 0.5 sec

0288. OVERLOAD (NET) - limit: 85.0 %

0289. - delay: 0.5 sec

0290. PF CAP. LOW - limit: 0.75

0291. - delay: 4.0 sec

0292. PE IND. LOW - limit: 0.75

0293. - delay: 4.0 sec

0294. REVERSE POWER - limit: 10.0 %

0295. - delay: 0.5 sec

0296. REACT.POWER IND.- limit: 40.0 %

0297. - delay: 0.5 sec

0298. NETLOAD excl.OWN- limit: 10.0 %

0299. - delay: 0.5 sec

0280. OVERSPEED - limit

ADDITIONAL LIMITSSetting range:

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,00-1,00

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,00-1,00

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

0,0-999,9 %

0,5…999,9 sec (0,5 sec steps)

Service Manual



0286. OVERLOAD (OWN) - limit :

Setting of an additional overload limit; if the actual measured load of the feeder exceeds this

limit event [0286] will be activated.


0288. OVERLOAD (NET) - limit :

Setting of an additional overload limit; if the actual measured load of the BUS section (net)

exceeds this limit event [0288] will be activated.


0290. PF CAP. LOW - limit :

Setting of a capacitive power factor limit; if the actual measured capacitive power factor

falls below this limit event [0290] will be activated.

0291. - delay : If event [0290] is active and this delay time is passed event [0291] will be activated and remain active as long as the actual value exceeds the limit of parameter [0290] (including 1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0292. PF IND. LOW - limit :

Setting of a inductive power factor limit; if the actual measured inductive power factor falls

below this limit event [0292] will be activated.

0293. - delay : If event [0292] is active and this delay time is passed event [0293] will be activated and remain active as long as the actual value exceeds the limit of parameter [0292] (including 1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0294. REVERSE POWER - limit :

Setting of an additional reverse power limit; if the actual measured reverse power exceeds

this limit event [0294] will be activated.


0296. REACT.POWER IND. - limit :

Setting of a reactive inductive power limit; if the actual measured reactive power (inductive

area only) exceeds this limit event [0296] will be activated.

Service Manual

SYMAP®



0298. NETLOAD excl.OWN - limit : Setting of a special overload limit; if the actual measured load of the BUS section (net), without the own load, exceeds this limit, event [0298] will be activated. This event can be used to cancel a stopping phase if the future net load becomes to high, during load reduction. For this purpose set event [0298] on parameter [0187] (remote start) and the device will make a restart of the engine.

0299. - delay : If event [0298] is active and this delay time is passed event [0299] will be activated.

Service Manual


3 Relay settings

Figures 3-1 to 3-3 show the ANSI device list, a list of the relay protection functions of which SYMAP® is capable.

Figure 3-1 ANSI-DEVICE LIST-1


SYSTEM ALARMS EXIT

24 Overexcitation relay

25 /A Synchronizing relay

27 Undervoltage relay

27 B Bus undervoltage relay

32 Overload relaqy

37 Undercurrent relay (motor)

40 Q Loss of exitation relay

46 Reverse phase relay

47 Phase sequence voltage relay

49 Thermal overload

50BF Breaker failure

15 Matching device (motorpoti)

ANSI-DEVICE LIST

SYSTEM ALARMS EXIT

50 Instantaneous overcurrent

50G/N Instant. Ground overcurrend

51 AC time overcurerend

51G/N AC time ground overcurrent

51LR Locked rotor (motor)

59 Overvoltage relay

59 B BUS overvoltage relay

61/59N Overvoltage ground relay

66 Start inhibit (motor)

67 AC directional overvoltage

67GS/GD AC directionald graund relay

78 Vector surge supervision

ANSI-DEVICE LIST

Service Manual

SYMAP®



SYSTEM ALARME ENDE

78 S Out of step tripping

79 AC reclosing relay

81 Frequency relay

81 B BUS frequency relay

86 Lockout relay

87 Differential protection

87N Restrict earth fault relay

94 Supervision relay

95i Inrush blocking relay

FF Fuse failurte (voltages)

AL Auxiliary limits

CW Contact wear measurement

ANSI-DEVICE LIST

Service Manual


3.1 ANSI 15 – Matching device (motorpoty)

With this functions it is possible to convert the speed and voltage binary event signals (UP/DOWN) from any sources to analog values, and proceed them to analog outputs or to the PWM output, in order to perform an analog regulation. The sources of binary event signals are all three-point-regulators (Load sharing, Frequency controller, Voltage regulation...), and any other sources, like communication, manual, binary inputs.

NOTE: This function is only operating with SYMAP® XG/BCG!

Figure 3-4 ANSI 15-1


BACK EXIT

: ANALOG

1026. - convert pulse: 1 sec= 1.0 mA

1027. – output preset : 90.0 %

1028. - activate preset by: 524

1097. - PWM frequency : 500 Hz

1098. - PWM amplitude max : 100.0 %

1099. - PWM amplitude min : 0.0 %

1055. VOLTAGE device enable : OFF

1056. - convert pulse: 1 sec= 1.5 mA

1057. - output preset : 95.0 %

1025. SPEED device enable

ANSI 15 Matching device (motorpoti)Setting range:

*

0.0-999.9 mA (% for PWM)

0.0-999.9 %

0-9999

5-5000 Hz

0.0-999.9 %

0.0-999.9 %

OFF/ON/INVERT

0.0-999.9 mA

0.0-999.9 %

*OFF/ANALOG/ANA.INVERT/PWM/

PWM INVERT/CAN BUS

BACK EXIT

1058. - activate preset by: 526

1280.SPEED – Regulation : OFF

1281. – match.device max: 120.0 %

1282. - match.device min: 80.0 %

1283. - Droop : 4.0 %

1284. - PID regulator : OFF

1285. - PID regulator Kp: 0.80

1286. - PID regulator Tn: 2000 ms

1287. - PID regulator Tv: 30 ms

1288. - output fullscale: 75.0 %


0-9999

OFF/ON

0.0-999.9 %

0.0-999.9 %

0.0-999.9 %

OFF/ON

0.0-655.34

0.0-65535 ms

0.0-65535 ms

0.0-999.9 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®




1025. SPEED device enable : Fixed switch to enable the device for different hardware outputs:

“OFF”: the function is disabled.

“ANALOG”: the function is routed to the analog outputs.

“ANA.INVERT”: the function is routed to the analog outputs and the output is inverted.

“PWM”: the function is routed to the PWM output.

“PWM INVERT”: the function is routed to the PWM output and the output is inverted.

„CAN BUS“: the function is routed to the CANBUS.

NOTE: For “ANALOG” and “ANA.INVERT” the related analog output must be set to “Speed ctrl” (see chapter 2.7). For “PWM” and “PWM INVERT” a special hardware edition is required. Contact the manufacturer for this function.

1026. - convert pulse : Converts a pulse of 1 sec to mA (or to % if PWM is used) according to this parameter; the pulses for the speed device comes from several functions. These functions are: the sync. units, load sharing, freq. controller, load reduction, binary inputs, communication, and the load page (manual speed control).

1027. - output preset : 1028. - activate preset by :

As long as the event (parameter [1028]) is active, the analog output (or PWM) will be set to parameter [1027].

NOTE: Also on Power-ON this preset will be executed so parameter [1027] should be set to a significant value (if the speed device is to be used).

1097. - PWM frequency : If PWM is used, the static PWM frequency have to be set with this parameter.

1098. - PWM amplitude max : 1099. - PWM amplitude min :

If PWM is used, the static max/min values for the PWM voltage signal amplitude have to be set with this parameters. The max. value is 100.0 % = 10 V.

BACK EXIT

1289. - output zeroscale: 25.0 %

1290.VOLT. – Regulation : OFF

1291. – match.device max: 120.0 %

1292. - match.device min: 80.0 %

1293. - Droop : 4.0 %

1294. - PID regulator : OFF

1295. - PID regulator Kp: 0.80

1296. - PID regulator Tn: 2000 ms

1297. - PID regulator Tv: 30 ms

1298. - output fullscale: 75.0 %

1299: - output zeroscale: 25.0 %


0.0-999.9 %

OFF/ON

0.0-999.9 %

0.0-999.9 %

0.0-999.9 %

OFF/ON

0.01-99.99

0.0-65000 ms

0.0-65000 ms

0.0-999.9 %

0.0-999.9 %

Service Manual


1055. VOLTAGE device enable : Fixed switch to enable the device; to use the voltage device also an analog output must be set to “Volt. ctrl” (see chapter 2.7). With “INVERT” it is possible to invert the output behavior of the device.

1056. - convert pulse : Converts a pulse of 1 sec to mA according to this parameter; the pulses for the voltage device comes from several functions. These functions are: the sync. units, voltage controller, power factor controller, binary inputs, communication, and the load page (manual voltage control).

1057. - output preset : 1058. - activate preset by :

See parameters [1027] and [1028].

With the following parameters an additional real time speed and voltage regulation can be activated. Only the parameters for the speed regulation [1280] to [1289] are explained here, because these parameters are the same as for the voltage regulation [1290] to [1299].

1280. SPEED - Regulation : Fixed switch to enable the additional real time speed regulation. The parameters [1281] to [1289] have absolutely no effect if this parameter [1280] is set to OFF.

1281. - match.device max : 1282. - match.device min :

With these parameters the analog value of the speed matching device must be adapted to the feedback value. The analog value can be seen as the output of an integrator. The feedback value is the actual measured speed (rpm or Hz).

Example: If the generator can operate only in the range of 40-60 Hz, and the nominal frequency is 50 Hz, than set this parameters to 80-120 %.

NOTE: If parameter [1280] is set to OFF, the min-max limitations are internally set to 0-100 %.

1283. - Droop : With this parameter a droop influence can be set. The droop is reducing the setpoint if the measured power is rising. If the power is 100 % or above, the set point will be reduced by max. the amount of parameter [1283]. If the power is 0%, the set point is not influenced at all. For the speed regulation the active power is taken into account and for the voltage regulation the reactive power. This parameter can be set to 0 %, if no droop influence is needed.

1284. - PID regulator : Fixed switch to enable or bypass the additional real time speed regulation with a PID regulator. The parameters [1285] to [1287] have absolutely no effect if this parameter [1284] is set to OFF. The output of the PID regulator is limited by the min-max values of the parameters [1281] and [1282]. The preset function of the parameters [1027] and [1028] is also working on the PID regulator.

1285. - PID regulator Kp : The Kp value represents the gain of the PID regulator. The gain influences the integration (I) and the differentiation (D) of the PID regulator. Higher values results in a more dynamic performance of the regulator.

1286. - PID regulator Tn : The Tn value represents the integration time of the PID regulator. Smaller values results in a more dynamic performance of the regulator.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1287. - PID regulator Tv : The Tv value represents the differentiation time of the PID regulator. Higher values results in a more dynamic performance of the regulator.

1288. - output fullscale : 1289. - output zeroscale :

With these parameters the regulator value must be adapted to the hardware output (analog output or PWM). The regulator value is the output of the PID regulator, or (if bypassed with parameter [1284]), the output of the matching device.

Example: If the analog output should operate only in the range of 5- 15 mA (45-55 Hz), then set this parameters to 25-75 % (5 mA = 25 % and 15 mA=75 %).

Refer to the Figures 3-7 and 3-8 for a schematic overview on the speed and voltage regulation.

Service Manual


Figure 3-7 ANSI 15 – Speed regulation

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 3-8 ANSI 15 – Voltage regulation

Service Manual


3.2 ANSI 24 – Overexcitation Relay

Figure 3-9 ANSI 24


1090. Overexcitation relay : If the over excitation relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1091. - U/F Limit value :

Limit setting of over excitation relay; if the relation between voltage and frequency exceeds

this limit event [1091] will be activated.

Example: If the voltage of the generator is 100 % of the nominal rated voltage and the

generator frequency is 98 % of nominal rated frequency then the difference is 2 %, which

will be compared with this parameter. If the actual measured difference exceeds the limit

value of parameter [1091] then event [1091] will be activated.

1092. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1901]; if event [1091] is active and this delay time is passed then event [1092] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1091]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1093. - min. voltage : Minimum voltage for relay operation; to secure a reliable relay function, the voltage limit of this parameter must exceed the limit to enable the protection function.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1091. - U/F Limit value : 25.0 %

1092. – delay time(definite): 2.0 sec

1093. - min. voltage : 70.0 %

1090. Overexcitation relay

ANSI 24 Overexcitation relaySetting range:

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.3 ANSI 25 /A – Automatic Synchronizing

Automatic synchronizing operates when two AC circuits are within the desired limits of frequency,

phase angle and voltage range, allowing these two circuits to parallel one another.

SYMAP® provides three automatic synchronizing units:

1. sync. unit 1 is responsible for the synchronization of the FEEDER BUS to BUS1;

2. sync. unit 2 is responsible for the synchronization of the FEEDER BUS to BUS2, and

3. sync. unit 3 is responsible for the synchronization of BUS1 and BUS2.

The synchronizing units are laid out redundant. Two processor systems are responsible for control

and the supervision of the main breaker-on contact of the synchronizing unit.

NOTE: About the calibration parameters [0042] to [0044] you can put the respective

synchronizing units 1 to 3 properly. On this occasion, the phase corner is calibrated to

neutralise the phase displacement. However, the calibration can occur only about the

parametertool (see Parametertool, chapter 2.4.4).

If SYMAP® is just used for ANSI 25 synchronizing check, only the following parameters are

required for setup:

sync. unit 1: parameters [1000] to [1007] and [1023]



SYMAP® parameters for Synchronizing Unit 1 (FEEDER BUS to BUS1) (figures 3-10 and 3-11):

Figure 3-10 ANSI 25/A-1

BACK EXIT

: 0

1001. - MAX phase anlage : 8 deg

1002. – MAX frequency diff. : 150 mHz

1003. - MIN frequency : 99,0 %

1004. - MAX frequency : 101,0 %

1005. - MAX voltage diff. : 5,0 %

1006. - MIN voltage : 95,0 %

1007. - MAX voltage : 105,0 %

1008. - freq.st.pulse time : 100,0 sec

1009. - freq.st.break time : 2,0 sec

1010. - speed push after 10s: 500 ms

1011. - volt.set.pulse time : 180,0 sec

1000. Sync. Unit 1 active by

ANSI 25 /A Synchronizing relaySetting range:

Eventnummer

0-30 deg

0-2000 mHz

70,0-100,0 %

100,0-130,0 %

0,1-30,0 %

70,0-100,0 %

100,0-130,0 %

0,1-999,9 s

0,1-999,9 s

0-9999 ms

0,1-999,9 s

Service Manual



SYMAP® parameters for Synchronizing Unit 2 (FEEDER BUS to BUS2) (figures 3-12 and 3-13):


BACK EXIT

1012. - volt.set.brak time : 0,5 sec

1013. – freq. higher event

1014. – freq. lower event

1015. - volt. higher event

1016. - volt. lower event

1017. - phose regu.active at : 120 mHz

1018. - phase 360 deg pulse : 1,00 sec

1019. - closing direction : DOWN

1020. - CB closing delay : 50 ms

1021. - live/dead cond. check: ON

1022. - min voltage leve : 10,0 %

1023. - CB sync. ON event

1024. - abnormal bus 1 event


0,1-999,9 sec

Even reminder for output




0-9999 mHz*

0,01-655,34 sec

UP/DOWN/BOTH

0-1000 ms

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %



*must be lower than

Parameter [P1002]

BACK EXIT

: 0




1034. - MAX frequency : 101,0 %


1036. - MIN voltage : 95,0 %

1037. - MAX voltage : 105,0 %







Event number

0-30 deg

0-2000 mHz

70,0-100,0 %

100,0-130,0 %

0,1-30,0 %

70,0-100,0 %

100,0-130,0 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0-9999 ms

0,1-999,9 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®



SYMAP® parameters for Synchronizing Unit 3 (BUS1 to BUS 2) (figures 3-14 and 3-15):


BACK EXIT







1048. - phase 360 deg pulse : 0.10 sec







ANSI 25 /A Synchronizing relayEinstellungsbereiche:

0,1-999,9 sec

Event reminder for outpot




0-9999 mHz

0,01-655,34 sec

UP/DOWN/BOTH

0-1000 ms

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %



BACK EXIT

: 0




1064. - MAX frequency : 101,0 %


1066. - MIN voltage : 95,0 %

1067. - MAX voltage : 105,0 %







Event number

0-30 deg

0-2000 mHz

70,0-100,0 %

100,0-130,0 %

0,1-30,0 %

70,0-100,0 %

100,0-130,0 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0-9999 ms

0,1-999,9 s

Service Manual




The following parameter descriptions correspond to Synchronizing Unit 1 (feeder to BUS1). Synchronizing Units 2 and 3 have the same parameters and differ only in their parameter and event numbers (see also description of synchronizing page within the user’s manual).

1000. Sync. Unit 1 active by : To activate the Synchronizing Unit No.1, an event number (e.g. binary input event) must be set. If this event number is active the synchronizing window appears and the synchronizer with its frequency and voltage controller is operative. If the Synchronizing Unit is active then the Synchronizing Site is indicated (see also chapter 2.4.4.8 in User’s Manual).

1001. - MAX phase angle : The maximum phase angle (positive and negative angle) appears in the window in which the closing order for the switching device (breaker) is given.

1002. - MAX frequency diff. : If the difference of frequency is higher than the set point then the synchron closing is blocked until the difference of frequency drops below the set point.

1003. - MIN frequency : Minimum frequency limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the frequency of BUS1 is below the minimum frequency limit then the frequency controller will be deactivated. That means the output to send speed lower signals will be blocked.

1004. - MAX frequency : Maximum frequency limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the frequency of BUS1 is above the maximum frequency limit then the frequency controller will be deactivated. That means the output to send speed higher signals will be blocked.

1005. - MAX voltage diff. : If the difference in voltages is higher than the set point the synchron closing will be blocked until the difference in voltages drops below the set point.

BACK EXIT







1078. - phase 360 deg pulse : 0.10 sec








0,1-999,9

Eventremainder für output




0-9999 mHz

0,01-655,34 sec

UP/DOWN/BOTH

0-1000 ms

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %



Service Manual

SYMAP®


1006. - MIN voltage : Minimum voltage limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the voltage of BUS1 is below the minimum voltage limit then the voltage controller will be deactivated. That means the output to send voltage lower signals will be blocked.

1007. - MAX voltage : Maximum voltage limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the voltage of BUS1 is above the maximum voltage limit then the voltage controller will be deactivated. That means the output to send voltage higher signals will be blocked.

1008. - freq.set.pulse time : The pulse characteristic for frequency adjustment during synchronization is set here. This time defines the pulse time which corresponds to 100% frequency difference (ΔF(%) = 100%). The calculated pulse time is modified by the difference between two frequency inputs as follows:

Calc. pulse(sec) = [Parameter [1008] / 100%] × ΔF(%)

with:

Parameter [1008]: defined pulse time at 100% frequency difference, ΔF(%): frequency difference between e.g. FEEDER BUS and BUS1 in

percent of nominal

Example: Parameter [1008] = 100 sec (typical setting):

There are case distinctions as follows:

ΔF(%) = 100% If the frequency difference between FEEDER BUS and BUS1 is 100%, then a calc. pulse of 100 seconds will be set.

ΔF(%) = 1% If the frequency difference is 1% (0.5 Hz at 50 Hz nominal frequency), then a calc. pulse of 1 sec will be set.

ΔF(%) > 0 If the frequency difference is positive (FFEEDER > FBUS1), then “freq. lower event” [1014] will be activated for the period calculated for the pulse time.

ΔF(%) < 0 If the frequency difference is negative (FFEEDER < FBUS1), then “freq. higher event” [1013] will be activated for the period calculated for the pulse time.

1009. - freq.set.break time : Typical setting: 2 sec The cycle time for the calculation of the pulse times for speed adjustment during synchronization is set here. At the beginning of the break time, the frequency controller will calculate and set the next pulse (see parameter [1008]).

1010. - speed push after 10 s : If the difference between the electrical angles of the generator and BUS does not become zero within 10 seconds then an impulse of the set time in this parameter will be given.

NOTE: Instead of the speed push, the phase regulator can be used.

1011. - volt.set.pulse time : The pulse time for voltage adjustment during synchronization is set here. Pulse time is modified by the difference between the voltages inputs.

Service Manual


1012. - volt.set.break time : The break time between pulse times for voltage adjustment during synchronization is set here.

1013. - freq. higher event : Use this event to activate a binary output in order to increase the frequency during synchronization.

1014. - freq. lower event :. Use this event to activate a binary output in order to lower the frequency during synchronization.

1015. - volt. higher event :. Use this event to activate a binary output in order to increase the voltage during synchronization.

1016. - volt. lower event :. Use this event to activate a binary output in order to lower the voltage during synchronization.

1017. - phase regu.active at : The phase regulation can be used to regulate the phase to zero if the two frequencies become nearly equal and the phase angle is nearly constant. If this parameter is set to 0 the phase regulator will be always inactive. Otherwise, if this parameter is set to a value > 0 the speed push (parameter [1010]) will be always inactive and the phase regulator will be activated in the following way: If the difference between the two frequencies reaches this low limit (parameter [1017]), the phase regulator becomes active. The phase regulator remains active so long the difference is under the limit of the “MAX of frequencies diff.” (Parameters [1002]) then the frequency regulator becomes again active (parameters [1017] < parameters [1002]).

1018. - phase 360 deg pulse : The pulse time for phase regulation is set here. The pulse time, which the phase regulator calculates after the break time (parameter [1009]), is modified by the actual phase angle. The formula for the pulse is: pulse (sec) = (Parameter [1018] * deg) / 360.

1019. - closing direction : The main breaker closing command will be given only when the engine speed is higher (UP), lower (DOWN) or in both directions (see also figure 3-13 and 3-14).

1020. - CB closing delay : The main breaker closing delay is the mechanical delay time caused by the closing time of contactors, relays and the main breaker itself. This delay time can reduce the time period of “breaker synchron on command” (event [1023]).

1021. - live/dead cond. check : ON/OFF-switch for dead condition check; if the synchronizing unit recognizes one side (feeder or BUS) below the voltage limit of parameter [1022] (dead system) and the other side within the voltage limits parameters [1006] and [1007] and the frequency limits parameters [1003] and [1004] (live system), then the event [1023] (CB sync.ON) will be activated without checking synchronization.

NOTE: If Device type - XG/BCG is selected and sync. unit 1 or 2 is active only the BUS will be checked for dead condition.

1022. - min. voltage level : If the live/dead condition check (event [1021]) is active and the voltage of one side (feeder or BUS) is below this voltage limit the synchronizing unit recognizes dead condition.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1023. - CB sync. ON event :. Use this event to send the main breaker close signal. This event will be set if the pointer of the synchronization unit is within the synchron window and the synchronization unit is not blocked.

1024. - abnormal BUS1 event :. Use this event to indicate BUS abnormal situation. If during synchronization the main conditions for voltage and frequency are not fulfilled for the BUS then BUS abnormal event will be set and the corresponding controller for voltage and frequency will be blocked (see parameters [1003], [1004], [1006] and [1007]).

Figure 3-16 shows the conditions that have to be fulfilled during synchronizing to set the “CB synchron event” (event [1023]). The parameter and event numbers correspond to Synchronizing Unit 1 (feeder to BUS1).


NOTE: In the case that the voltages of both systems are “alive” and one system has negative sequence, the synchronizer will be internally blocked and event [2949] gets active (use this event for an alarm). If both systems have negative sequence the synchronizing process is not blocked.

SYNCHR. UNIT 1 ON

Parameter [1000]

UBUS1 > UMIN

Parameter [1006]

UBUS1 < UMAX

Parameter [1007]

FBUS1 > FMIN

Parameter [1003]

FBUS1 < FMAX

Parameter [1004]

&

³1

&

Freq. Ctrl. release

Freq. Ctrl. release

|UBUS1 - UFreeder|<Parameter [1005]

|UBUS1 - UFeede|<Parameter [1002]

|akt. Phasenwinkel|<Parameter [1001]

MB close command

(here: Parameter [1019]:

„both“ Event [1023]

Main condition for „MB ON“ command

abnormal BUS

Event [1024]

Service Manual


The figures 3-17 and 3-18 show the closing direction philosophy. If closing direction “UP” (parameter [1019]) is selected and if the feeder frequency is higher than the BUS frequency then the main breaker synchron close command will be given (see figure 3-17).

Time

Frequency

FMAX; Para. [1004]

FBUS

FMIN; Para. [1003]

Para. [1004]

1 1 2 1 2 1 2

1: No „C. B. ON“ Command

2: „C. B. ON“ Command, allowed if Phase synchron and voltage O.K.

Sychronizing windowClosing direction: „UP“

(FFeeder < FBUS)

Phase angle Cursor direction: to the left

FFeed

2

Figure 3-17 ANSI 25 /A-8

If closing direction “DOWN” (parameter [1019]) is selected and if the feeder frequency is lower than the BUS frequency then the main breaker synchron close command will be given (see figure 3-18).

Zeit

Frequency

FMAX; Para. [1004]

FBUS

FMIN; Para. [1003]

Para. [1004]

1 1 2 1 2 1

1: No „C. B. ON“ Command

2: „C. B. ON“ Command, allowed if Phase and voltage O.K.

Sychronizing windowClosing direction: „DOWN“

(FFeeder > FBus)

Phase angle Cursor direction: to the left

FFeed

2

Figure 3-18 ANSI 25 /A-9

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.4 ANSI 27 – Undervoltage Relay

The undervoltage relay is a relay that operates when its input voltage is less than a predetermined

value. ≥ 1Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Undervoltage protection is generally used for load shedding and loss of phase purposes (see figure 3-19).

Figure 3-19 ANSI 27


1100. Undervoltage relay : This parameter activates the undervoltage supervision, whereby:

“OFF”: deactivates,

“ON”: activates, and

“CB ON”: activates the undervoltage supervision only if the circuit breaker is switched on.

1101. - Undervoltage 1. limit : First limit of the set point for undervoltage

1102. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1101]; use this event to activate an output.

1103. - Undervoltage 2. limit : Second limit of the set point for undervoltage

1104. - Time delay (definite) : Time delay of event [1103]; use this event to activate an output.

1105. - MIN start voltage : This parameter depends on the device type.

Device type BC or X: During the startup sequence, this limit must be reached in order to activate the undervoltage protection.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1101. – Undervoltage 1.limit: 95,0 %

1102. – Delay time(definite): 2,00 sec

1103. – Undervoltage 2.limit: 93,0 %

1104. – Delay time(definite): 3,00 sec

1105. – Min. start voltage : 90,0 %

1106. – Min. frequency : 55,0 Hz

1100. Undervoltage relay

ANSI 27 Undervoltage relay Setting renge:

ON/OFF/CB ON

0,0-99,9 %

0,03-99,99 sec

0,0-99,9 %

0,03-99,99 sec

0,0-99,9 %

0,0-99,9 Hz

Service Manual


Device type BCG or XG: This parameter is not active, since the undervoltage relay works when the main breaker is on; otherwise, it is blocked.

1106. - MIN frequency : This parameter depends on the device type.

Device type BC or X: When the feeder frequency is lower than this setting, the undervoltage protection function is disabled.

Device type BCG or XG: This parameter is not active, since the undervoltage relay works when the main breaker is on; otherwise, it is blocked.

Figure 3-20 Logic diagram for the undervoltage protection

&

Startup

U > 3 ~

„1"onP 1105 Setting

E 1100 27 aktive

ANSI 27

Minimum

f > 3~

P 1106 Setting

&

U <

3~

P 1101 27-1 Pickup

&U<<

3~

P 1103 27-2 Pickup

0 T

P 1102 27-1 Delay.

E 1103 Limit reached

0 T

P 1104 27-2 Delay.


E 1102 27-1 Trip

E 1104 27-2 Trip

off

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.5 ANSI 27 B – BUS undervoltage relay

There are two independent undervoltage relays for the BUS1 and BUS2 measure inputs available (see figure 3-21). The undervoltage (BUS) relay operates when its input voltage from BUS side is less than a predetermined value. Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Undervoltage protection is generally used for load shedding and loss of phase purposes.

Figure 3-21 ANSI 27 B


The parameters for the BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in the following only the BUS1 parameters are described:

1120. BUS1 undervoltage relay : The enable switch for the undervoltage relay

1121. - Undervoltage 1. limit : First limit of the set point for undervoltage; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.

1122. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1121]; use the event [1122] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

1123. - Undervoltage 2. limit : Second limit of the set point for under voltage; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.


1125. - Minimum startvoltage : 1126. - Minimum frequency :

If the startvoltage is reached by all 3 phases and the frequency limit is reached the undervoltage relay remains always active until power on reset.

ZURÜCK ENDE

: OFF

1121. – Undervoltage 1.limit : 95,0 %

1122. – Delay time(definite) : 2,0 sec



1125. – Minimum startvoltage : 90,0 %

1126. – Minimum frequency : 55,0 Hz

1110. BUS2 undervoltage relay: ON





1115. – Minimum startvoltage : 90,0 %

1116. – Minimum frequency : 55,0 Hz

1120. Bus1 Undervoltage relay

ANSI 27 B Bus undervoltage relay Einstellungsbereiche:

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

0,0-99,9 Hz

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,0-99,9 %

0,0-99,9 Hz

Service Manual


3.6 ANSI 32 – Overload Relay

Figure 3-22 ANSI 32


1130.Overload relay : The overload relay can be deactivated/activated by the following setting options:

“OFF“: the overload relay is disabled,

“ON“: the overload relay is enabled; characteristic values for limits (parameters [1131, 1133, 1135 1137] refer to “reverse power” or “active power”,

“ON_S“: the overload relay is enabled; characteristic value for limits (parameters [1131, 1133, 1135 1137] refers to “apparent power S”.

1131. - 1. limit reverse power : First limit of the reverse power relay; if the reverse power exceeds this limit event [1131] will be set.

1132. - Delay time (definite) : If event [1131] is active and the corresponding delay time is passed event [1132] will be set. Use this event to activate an output.

1133. - 2. limit reverse power : Second limit of the reverse power relay; if the reverse power exceeds this limit event [1133] will be set. Use this event to activate an output.


1135. - 1. limit active power : First limit of the active power relay; if the active power exceeds this limit event [1135] will be set.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1131. – 1.limit reverse power: 10,0 %

1132. – Delay time (definite): 2,0 sec

1133. – 2.limit reverse power: 15,0 %


1135. – 1.limit active power : 100,0 %


1137. – 2.limit active power : 120,0 %


1139. Block reverse power : 0

1145. Fwd power blocking : 0

1130. Overload relay

ANSI 32 Overload relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,1-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,1-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,1-199,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

0,1-199,9 %

0,1-99,9 %

0-9999 Event number

0-9999 Event number

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1136. - Delay time ( definite) : If event [1135] is active and the corresponding delay time is passed event [1136] will be set. Use this event to activate an output.

1137. - 2. limit active power : Second limit of the active power relay; if the active power exceeds this limit event [1137] will be set. Use this event to activate an output.


1139. Block reverse power : The reverse power protection (parameters [1131] to [1134]) is disabled if the event set under parameter [1139] is active.

1145. Fwd power blocking by : The active power protection (parameters [1135] to [1137]) only in forward direction is disabled if the event set under parameter [1145] is active.

Service Manual


3.7 ANSI 37 – Undercurrent Relay (motor)

Figure 3-23 ANSI 37


1140. Undercurrent relay : If the undercurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1141. - Min. current limit : 1142. - Max. current limit :

If one of the three current phases is between these current limits (parameters [1141] and [1142]) the events [1141] and [1142] will be activated.

1143. - Delay time (definite) : If the undercurrent relay is active and the corresponding delay time is passed the undercurrent relay will be tripped (event [1143] will be activated).

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1141. – Min. current limit : 12,0 %

1142. – Max. current limit : 45,0 %


1140. Undercurrent relay

ANSI 37 - Undercurrent relay (motor) Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,1-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 %

0,1-99,9 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.8 ANSI 40 Q – Loss of Excitation Relay

Field relay is a relay that functions on a given or abnormally low value or failure of machine field current, or on an excessive value of the reactive component of armature current in an AC-machine indicating abnormally low field excitation. When partial or complete loss of excitation occurs on a synchronous machine, (ind.) reactive power flows from the system into the machine.

There are two measuring principles to detect “loss of field” status:

40 Q: The first measuring principle of this relay is to detect only the quantity and direction of the reactive power. If the inductive reactive power exceeds a definite limit, then the “ANSI 40 Q loss of excitation relay” will be activated.

40: The second measuring principle is to define the impedance circle area in whichthe actual measured impedance vector must be within the “ANSI 40. loss of excitation” circle before the appropriate relay will be activated.

NOTE: For the impedance measurement, the phase current I1 and the line voltages U31 and U12 will be evaluated.

Two impedance circles can be defined, one for the static and the other for the dynamical characteristic.

Figure 3-24 ANSI 40 Q-1


1170. Loss of excitation relay : If the loss of excitation relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1171. – reactive power limit : 35,0 %

1172. – delay time (definite): 4,0 sec

1173. – min. voltage : 70,0 %

1174. Circle 1 : ON

1175. - diameter : 4,0 Ohm

1176. - offset : 1,0 Ohm

1177. - delay : 1,5 sec

1178. Circle 2 : ON

1179. - diameter : 2,2 Ohm

1180. - offset : 1,5 Ohm

1181. - delay : 0,5 sec

1182. ANSI21 backup : ON

1183. Impedance zone1 : 3,0 Ohm

1184. - delay time :165,00 sec

1185. - reset time : 65,00 sec

1186. Impedance zone1 : 3,0 Ohm

1187. - delay time :165,00 sec

1188. - reset time : 65,00 sec

1189. Block protection by : 0 ev

1170.Loss of exitation relay

ANSI 40 Q Loss of exitation relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 %

ON/OFF

0,1-999,9 Ohm

0,1-999,9 Ohm

0,1-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0,1-999,9 Ohm

0,1-999,9 Ohm

0,1-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0,01-650,00 Ohm

0,03-650,00 s

0,03-650,00 s

0,01-650,00 Ohm

0,03-650,00 s

0,03-650,00 s

0-9999 Event numer

Service Manual


1171. - reactive power limit : If the inductive reactive power exceeds this limit then event [1171] will be activated. The percentage setting of the inductive reactive power refers to the active power PN.

1172. - delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1171]; if event [1171] is active and this delay time is passed then event [1172] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1171]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1173. - min. voltage : Three-phase feeder voltage supervision; the feeder voltage must be higher than this setting in order to activate this protection.

1174. Circle 1 : 1175. - diameter : 1176. - offset : 1177. - delay :

ON/OFF switch of circle 1: Activation of first impedance circle parameter [1174]; the Impedance Circle 1 will be activated by setting this parameter to “ON.”

Impedance circle definition: The impedance area of the Circle 1 will be defined with the offset parameter [1175] and diameter parameter [1176]. If the actual measured impedance is within this area event [1174] will be activated.

Definite delay time: If the actual measure impedance is within Circle 1 and this definite delay time is passed then event [1177] will be activated as long as the actual measured impedance moves out of Impedance Circle 1. Please use parameter [1177] for the alarm or output controller.

1178. Circle 2 : 1179. - diameter : 1180. - offset : 1181. - delay :

Same parameter setting as parameters [1174] to [1177]; normally, Circle 1 will be used for supervision the static, Circle 2 for the dynamical characteristic.

Figure 3-25 ANSI 40 Q-2 trip area for loss of field supervision

r2 C2

X

R

Offset 2 Parameter [1180] Offset 1 Parameter [1176]

Diameter 2 Parameter [1179]

Whereby: r2 = Diameter 2/2 C2= Offset2+Diameter 2/2

Circle 2

Circle 1

Diameter 1 Parameter [1179]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.9 ANSI 46 /RP – Negative Sequence Relay / Rotor Protection

Phase Unbalance Protection based on negative sequence currents Basics: When synchronous generators are loaded with currents that are not strictly symmetrical (this means that either values of the three currents are different and / or the phase-shift is not exactly 120°), this will lead to currents in the damper rods on the rotor. The additional rotor current will lead to heat dissipation and temperature rise of the rotor. If this unbalance of currents exceeds the permissible value, the rotor will get too hot. ANSI 46 RP is a protection function against unbalanced loading of a generator. One way to measure the unbalance of currents is to calculate the negative sequence content of the three phase system. This means that the currents are split into a theoretical set of three perfectly balanced three phase systems, of which one is rotating in the same direction as the rotor (positive sequence), one is rotating in the opposite direction (negative sequence) and one that has the same phase angle for all three currents (zero sequence). With the following formulas, any real three phase system can be transformed into these “symmetrical components”:

)240()120()(*3

1 tItItII TSRp

positive sequence part

)120()240()(*3

1 tItItII TSRn

negative sequence part

)()()(*3

10 tItItII TSR zero sequence part

Whereby t signifies the instant of observation and the phase shift angles refer to times in the past. In practical programming, the phase shift is generated by taking values out of the appropriate cells in memory. The three resulting currents are AC values, of which an RMS value is calculated in the relay. In theory, symmetrical components exist only for sinusoidal currents. With an acceptable error, the calculation can be executed also for currents with low THD values. This protection function will provide useful results up to a THD-level of app. 6%. Please observe that especially harmonics with an order number that is a multiple of three have a comparatively high influence on the calculated negative sequence value. High THD-levels will (especially as found when the generator feeds cyclo converters) make the protection function unreliable with a tendency to over-function. Such high THD values will lead to additional heating of the rotor and require special engineering in the design phase of the generator. Rotor protection based on different principles is required for this application. Required inputs: Feeder current (3phase), connected to terminals X1.1...6.

Service Manual


Figure 3-26 ANSI 46


1200. Reverse phase relay : For activating the negative sequence relay, set this parameter to “ON”, for disabling the protection function, set it to “OFF”. If it is set to “RECLOSE”, the function is active in a special mode. It opens and closes the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1201. - Limit value : This value is the permanently permissible negative sequence current. It is set in percent of the stator nominal current as set in the parameter section “NOMINALS”. The range is 0.1 … 100.0%. No extra calculation is required to take current transformer ratios into consideration; this is done in the background by the relay.

1202. - Time multiplier (TMS) : Definite delay time or time multiplier for inverse curves, see parameter [1203]. In case P[1203] is set to “K-factor”, this factor describes the time constant of the machine while the negative sequence current exceeds the Limit value P[1201]. It is set in seconds, the range is 0.1 … 40.0. No extra calculation is required to take current transformer ratios into consideration; this is done in the background by the relay.

1203. - Curve shape : Select definite time or inverse curves. “definite time”: Parameter [1202] is a definite delay time between pickup and trip. “norm.inverse” normal inverse characteristic with the following formula for the trip delay time:

1

5,13*]1202[

2

]1201[

Parameter

negative

trip

I

I

parametert

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1201. – Limit value : 95,0 %

1202. – Time multiplier (TMS): 2,00 sec

1203. – Curve shape : definite

1204. – Min. feeder voltage : 3,0 %

1205. - 1.limit : 10,0 %

1206. – Delay time (definite): 1000 ms

1207. – 2.limit : 12,0 %

1208. - Delay time (definite): 500 ms

1209. - Volt. restrain[51VR] : OFF

1190. - K-reset (cool down) : 40,00 sec

1191. - Block protection by : 895

1200. Reverse phase relay

ANSI 46 Reverse phase relay Setting range:

ON/OFF/reclose

0,0-99,9 %

0,0-99,99 sec

1,0-99,9 %

0,0-99,9 %

0-9999 ms

0,0-99,9 sec

0-9999 ms

ON/OFF

0,00-99,99 sec

0-9999 event numer

* Norm.inverse & definite time

k-factor

Service Manual

SYMAP®


“K”-factor This protection function provides a rough thermal modelling for the rotor. A short, high negative sequence current can be tolerated as well as a longer lasting, lower current. In order to describe the heating effect of the negative sequence current, a curve according to the following formula was found to fit best:

2

min_

alNoStator

negative

trip

I

I

Kt

ttrip is the time to trip, Inegative is the measured negative sequence current and IStator_Nominal is the stator nominal current. Calculation starts when the measured negative sequence current exceeds the permanently permissible negative sequence current Inegative_perm. The value for “K” describes the time constant of the rotor. It can be obtained from the generator manufacturers. This factor is the duration (in seconds) for which the negative sequence current is allowed to be as high as the stator nominal current ( Inegative = IStator_Nominal ). The time constants vary with design of the rotor, the type of cooling and with the speed of the generator, so no general rule of thumb is available to calculate the “K”-values from the nominal power of the generator.

1204. - Min. feeder voltage : The feeder voltage must be higher than this setting in order to activate this protection function. This parameter is used to avoid unwarranted trips during standstill and startup.

1205. - 1. limit : This is an extra limit function independent of the setting according to Parameter[1201…1203]. It is set in percent of the stator nominal current as set in the parameter section “NOMINALS”. The range is 0.1 … 100.0%. An event will be activated when the negative sequence current exceeds this value. For example, this event can be used to activate a warning contact. No other action is derived from this value. So the limit can be set as is suits best for operation. It can be lower, higher or equal to the limit current P[1201]. There is a 5% hysteresis for the fall-back of the event.

1206. - Delay time (definite) : After condition of event [1205] has become true, this delay time starts and event [1206] will be activated after this delay has expired. Use this event to activate an output.

1207. - 2. limit : This is an extra limit function independent of the setting according to Parameter[1201…1203]. It is set in percent of the stator nominal current as set in the parameter section “NOMINALS”. The range is 0.1 … 100.0%. An event will be activated when the negative sequence current exceeds this value. For example, this event can be used to activate a trip if an absolute maximum is exceeded. No other action is derived from this value. So the limit can be set as is suits best for operation. It can be lower, higher or equal to the limit current P[1201]. There is a 5% hysteresis for the fall-back of the event.

Service Manual


1208. - Delay time(definite) : After condition of event [1207] has become true, this delay time starts and event [1208] will be activated after this delay has expired. Use this event to activate an output.

1209. - Volt. restrain [51VR] : For activating the voltage restrain functionality, set this parameter to “ON”, for disabling the protection function, set it to “OFF”. The settings for the curve as shown in the following graph are fixed and cannot be altered. If the voltage restrain function is active the current set point will be reduced by the voltage as shown in figure 3-23.

0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%

Voltage

Cu

rve

Pic

ku

p M

ultip

lier

Figure 3-27 Diagram of the voltage restrain calculation curve

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1190. - K-reset(cool down) : This factor describes the time constant of the machine while the negative sequence current is below the Limit value [P1201] after a permissible negative sequence overcurrent. If the negative sequence current falls below the permissible value, the rotor cools down. The relay takes this into consideration and provides a parameter for cooling time constant, also as a “K”-value. If the cooling time constant is set to zero, the counter for rotor heat will be reset immediately when the current falls below the permissible value. When no cooling time constant is provided by the generator manufacturer, the same “K”-value should be applied as for the heating.

1191. - Block protection by : This parameter describes the SYMAP event number which will block the whole protection function (ANSI46). In addition this event will reset the heat counter. It should only be used for testing purposes.

Example: The following diagram shows the cooling and heating curve with the following parameters: Parameter [1201] I Limit = 10,0 % = Inegative_perm = 0,10 * IStator_Nominal

Parameter [1205]I Limit 1 = 13,0 % = Inegative_warning = 0,13 * IStator_Nominal

Parameter [1207]I Limit 2 = 33,0 % = Inegative_trip = 0,33 * IStator_Nominal

Parameter [1202] K = 20 s Parameter [1190] K cool = 20 s.

Figure 3-28 heating and cooling curve

The relay will calculate the contribution of each time slice independently and accumulate the calculated temperature in memory, so it will handle variable currents correctly. A time-slice is equal

Service Manual


to one cycle of the mains frequency for K-values below 1 s, and is increased by one cycle for each full second of the K-value. The cooling curve describes the time it will take the rotor to cool down from trip-level temperature to normal operating temperature. For example if the rotor was heated nearly up to trip level and the negative sequence current falls to 95% of the permissible limit, the relay will assume that after approximately half an hour the temperature will be back to normal when the settings are as listed above. See example above. The actual trip time will be the calculated time plus the pickup-time, which is generally two time-slices according to the paragraph above. After a reset of the relay (power up or new parameter set entered), the relay will reset all memory, so the temperature calculation will start from normal operation, any information about previous rotor heating will be lost. A reset input for the rotor temperature model is available in combination with the blocking parameter P[1191]. This reset should only be used for relay tests, since the real temperature of the rotor has no reset button.

Figure 3-29 Logic diagram for the reverse phase/balance protection

„1" E 1200 46 aktive

ANSI 46

off

on

reclose

³ 1

Startup

U > 3 ~

P 1204 Setting

S1

RReset

Q

&

P 1201 46-TOC Pickup

3~

&

VR_EN


0 T

P 1203 IDMT Curve

P 1202 TMS

&

E 1205 Limit reached P 1206 46-1 DelayP 1205 46-1 Pickup

3~

VR_EN

P 1207 46-2 Pickup

3~

VR_EN

0 T&

E 1207 Limit reached P 1208 46-2 Dealy

Voltage Restrain

on/off

on/off

Reclose

on/off

Reclose

on/off

Reclose

E 1202 46-TMS Trip

E 1206 46-1 Trip

E 1208 46-2 Trip

³ 1

ANSI 79 Reclose

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.10 ANSI 47 – Phase sequence voltage relay

The phase sequence voltage relay is a relay that functions upon a predetermined value of polyphase

voltage in the desired phase sequence.

Figure 3-30 ANSI 47


1300. Phase sequence relay : The normal voltage phase sequence is right rotating, that means L1-L2-L3. If the sequence turns to left rotating or one phase is missing the relay becomes active. If the negative sequence relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1301. -.Limit value : If the left rotating field exceeds the limit the phase sequence relay will be activated.

1302. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay for event [1301]; use this event to activate an output.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1301. – Limit value : 20,0 %


1300. Phase sequence relay

ANSI 47 Phase sequence voltage relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

1,0-199,9 %

0,01-99,99 sec

Service Manual


3.11 ANSI 49 – Thermal Overload

The thermal overload relay is divided in 3 independent sections (see figures 3-30, 3-31 and 3-32, and 3-33). Any of the sections can be activated and used independently of each other.

3.11.1 Thermal overload I (general)

This section calculates a thermal image in accordance to the current (see figure 3-30).



1340. THERMAL OVERLOAD : ON/OFF-switch for thermal overload protection

1341. - Nominal rated current [xxxx]A : Overload current of the nominal rated current of the motor; pickup value for thermal motor protection 49; if the current reaches this limit event [1341] will be set.

1342. - Cold limit at 6*In : This parameter is required to calculate τh. This trip time is taken from the cold curve of the

motor. The trip time in the curve is taken from 6*In.

1343. - Hot limit at 6*In : This parameter is required to set the characteristic of the hot curve and limit the thermal image value.

1344. - tc/th : The relationship between τ of the hot and the cold curve is required to calculate τc.

1345. - Trip time reset delay : If the trip time is active and the actual current is below the nominal rated (set with parameter [1341]) the time value will be held for this time before reset.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1341. – Rated current[ 1000]A: 20,0 %

1342. – Cold limit at 6*In : 10,0 sec

1343. - Hot limit at 6*In : 20,0 sec

1344. - tc / th : 5,0

1345. – Trip time reset delay: 10,0 sec

1346. – Event for trip

- tc (calculated) = 16,7 min

- th (calculated) = 11,1 min

- Preload at 6*In (T6h)= 67,0 %

1340. THERMAL OVERLOAD

ANSI 49 Thermal overload Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,1-999,9 %

0,1…999,9 sec (0,25 s-Schritten)

0,1…999,9 sec (0,25 s-Schritten)

1,0-999,9

0,1-999,9 sec

Event only

Calculated from [1342]&[1344]

Calculated from [1342]

Calculated from [1343]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1346. - Event for trip time : If the trip time is passed according to the thermal overload conditions event [1346] will be set. Choose this event to initiate a trip signal by using a binary output.

- tc (calculated) : Calculated value τc. Result of the formula:

- th (calculated) : Calculated value τh . Result of the formula:

The time t will be taken from the cold curve of the motor at six times the nominal rated current. The threshold factor k is fixed with 1.03. The result of τh is calculated as follows:

- Preload at 6*In (T6h) : Calculated maximum preload value with the formula:

The time will be taken from the hot curve of the motor at six times the nominal rated current. The threshold factor k is fixed with 1.03. The result is the maximum preload value which will be limited by the hot curve of the motor.

The relationship is:

2

PrPr )/(* InIk ee

The thermal image of the motor will be calculated all the time and follows the formula:

t

SCS e*)((%)

with: ΘC: the current motor image ΘS: thermal status destination, which will be calculated with (Iactual/In)² τ: Tau: During heating τh and during cooling, τc will be used.

hc parameter *1344

22

2

/

/ln

kInI

InI

th

22

2

)03.1(6

6ln

])1342[(6 parametercTh

2222

Pr22

2

Pr

2

)/(*)/()/(/

)/(/ln* kInIeInIInI

kInI

InIInIt h

t

ee

h

22

])1343[6

22

Pr 03.1)6(*)6()/(

h

hT

e eInI

motortheofimagethermaltheiswhichtorelatesInI e 2

Pr )/(

Service Manual


If the actual motor current exceeds the limit of parameter [1341] (rated current) the trip time integrator will be activated. The tripping time t of the thermal overload relay is calculated according to the following formula and to the corresponding preload value (IPre/IN)²:

with: I: the actual measured current IN: the thermal overload (set with parameter [1341]) k: the threshold factor (1.03)

²/

)/(/ln*

2

2

Pr

2

kII

IIIIt

N

NeNc

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.11.2 Thermal overload II (user)

This section gives the user the possibility to define his own curve with 10 current/time points. Between these points, the time values will be linear interpolated (see figures 3-31 and 3-32).




1350. THERMAL OVERLOAD (user) : OFF/ON-switch for this relay section. If the relay is tripped event [1350] will be set.

1351. - integrator reset mode : Defines the reset mode of the time integrator if the current falls below the limit of parameter [1353]:

“hold time”: The integrator will be reset if the time of parameter [1352] has passed.

“depending”: The integrator will be integrated downwards with the last excitation time. This time can be limited with parameter [1352].

BACK EXIT

1350. THERMAL OVERLOAD (user) : ON

1351. – integrator reset mode : depending

1352. – integrator hold time : 300.0 sec

1353. - current limit : 110.0 %

1354. - time :3600.0 sec

1355. - current point 1 : 111.0 %

1356. - time :1800.0 sec

1357. - current point 2 : 114.0 %

1358. - time : 900.0 sec

1359. - current point 3 : 123.0 %

1360. - time : 300,0 sec

1361. - current point 4 : 145.0 %

ANSI 49 Thermal overloadSetting range:

OFF/ON

Hold time/depending

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

BACK EXIT

1362. - time : 120.0 sec

1363. - current point 5 : 180.0 %

1364. - time : 30.0 sec

1365. - current point 6 : 230.0 %

1366. - time : 10.0 sec

1367. - current point 7 : 400.0 %

1368. - time : 3.0 sec

1369. - current point 8 : 0.0 %

1370. - time : 0.0 sec

1371. - current point 9 : 0.0 %

1372. - time : 0.0 sec


0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

0,0-6553,5 %

0,0-6553,5 sec

Service Manual


1352. - integrator hold time : Hold time for the integrator if the current falls below the limit of parameter [1353].

1353. - current limit : Excitation limit for the time integration and the starting point of the curve; if the current reaches this limit, the time integration will be activated.

1354. - time : The max. trip time for limit parameter [1353]

1355. - current point 1 : 1356. - time :

to 1371. - current point 9 : 1372. - time :

Every point consists of one current limit and the related time (max. trip time for the current at this point). If the current is between two limits the related time will be linearly calculated. The limits must be ascending, beginning at the first point. If a limit is 0 the curve will be truncated at the previous limit (see figure 3-29).

Example:

Figure 3-34 Current/time curve of thermal overload II

I (%)

t (sec)

400

300

200

100

3600 1800 900 300 120 30 10 3

× P [1363] and P [1364]

× P [1361] and P [1362]

× P [1359] and P [1360]

× P [1357] and P [1358]

× P [1355] and P [1356]

× P [1353] and P [1354]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.11.3 Thermal overload III (interval)

This section gives the user the possibility to define a interval time in which the current has a defined

allow time for remaining above a limit.



1373. INTERVAL PROTECTION : Event-switch for this relay section

Event active: The function will be activated.

Event inactive: The function will be reset.

If the relay is tripped event [1373] will be activated.

1374. - current limit : If the current reaches this limit the time integration will be activated.

1375. - allow time : If the integration reaches this time limit the relay will trip and the event [1373] will be activated.

1376. - interval time : The allow time is only valid within this interval time. If one of the integrated periods overlaps this interval the integrated time will be decreased by the period (if the current is below the limit of parameter [1374]).

BACK EXIT

1373. interval protection : 524

1374. - current limit : 110.0 %

1375. - allow time : 60 min

1376. - interval time : 12 h


Event 0-9999

0,1-999,9 %

1-999 min

1-24 h

Service Manual


3.12 ANSI 50 BF – Breaker Failure

Breaker failure relay supervises the circuit breaker.

Figure 3-36 ANSI 50BF


380. Breaker failure relay : ON/OFF - switch for breaker failure protection

1381. - Current limit (CB:OFF) : If the circuit breaker is off (feedback of circuit breaker or trip command) and a current is higher then the limit in parameter [1381] the breaker failure relay will be activated.

1382. - Delay time (definite) : Delay time of breaker failure relay

Figure 3-37 Logic connection of failure relay

CB: off (Feedback)

Trip command

Act. Current value > Current limit P[1381]

≥1

& Event

E[1382]50BF

Manual OFF

BACK EXIT

: ON

1381. – Current limit(CB:OFF): 10,0 %

1382. – Dealy time (definite): 2 sec

1380. Breaker failure relay

ANSI 50BF Braker failure relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

0-999,9 %

0-9999 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.13 ANSI 50 – Instantaneous overcurrent relay

Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-rise relay is a relay that functions instantaneously on excessive

value of current or on an excessive rate of current.

Figure 3-38 ANSI 50


1400. Instantaneous overcurr. : If the instantaneous overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If it is set to “RECLOSE” it closes the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1401. - 1. limit [xxxx]A :

First limit setting of instantaneous overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds this

limit event [1401] will be set.

1402. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1401]; if event [1401] is active and this delay time is passed the event [1402] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1401]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1403. reserved :

1404. - 2. limit [xxxx]A :

Second limit setting of instantaneous overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds this

limit event [1404] will be set.

1405. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1404] if event [1404] is active and this delay time is passed the event [1405] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1404]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1406. reserved :

1407. - Rev. limit [xxxx]A :

Limit setting of instantaneous overcurrent is active only if the current direction is going into

the reverse direction. If the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1407] will be set.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1401. – 1. limit [ 3000]A: 300.0 %


1403. reserved:

1404. – 2. limit [ 3000]A: 300.0 %


1406. reserved:

1407. – Rev. limit [ 3000]A: 300.0 %


1409. reserved:

1410. – Inrush blocking : OFF

1400. Instantanneous overcurr.

ANSI 50 Instantaneous overcurrent Setting range:

ON/OFF/reclose/

2,0-2999,9 %

30-9999 ms

2,0-2999,9 %

30-9999 ms

2,0-2999,9 %

30-9999 ms

ON/OFF

Service Manual



1409. reserved :

1410. - Inrush blocking : The delay times of parameters [1402], [1405] and [1408] can be extended if inrush conditions referring to ANSI 95i are detected.

Figure 3-39 Logic diagram for the instantaneous overcurrent protection

„1" E 1400 50 aktiv

ANSI 50

off

on

reclose

³ 1

P 1401 50-1 Pickup

I >

3~

&

Inrush EN


0 T

P 1402

&

E 1404 Limit reached P 1405 50-2 DelayP 1404 1404 Pickup

0 T&

E 1407 Limit reached P 1408 50-Rev. Delay

Inrush Blocking

on/off

on/off

Reclose

on/off

Reclose

on/off

Reclose

E 1402 50-1 Trip

E 1406 50-2 Trip

E 1408 50 Rev Trip

³ 1

ANSI 79 Reclose

I >>

3~

Inrush EN

P 1407 50-Rev. Pickup

IRev

> 3~

Inrush EN

„1"

0 T

50-1 Delay

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.14 ANSI 50G/N – Instantaneous ground overcurrent relay

Instantaneous ground overcurrent or ground rate-of-rise relay is a relay that functions

instantaneously on excessive value of current or on an excessive rate of current. The permissible setting range of this relay depends upon the hardware (refer to the purchase information of the hardware to get the appropriate internal current transformers).

Figure 3-40 ANSI 50G/N


1420. Inst. ground overcurr. relay : If the instantaneous ground overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1421. - Limit : Limit setting of instantaneous ground overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds the instantaneous ground overcurrent limit event [1421] will be activated.

The unit of the limit value can be set between “%” and “mA” via parameter [0053]; (see PC Parameter tool special parameter).

“%”: If the unit is set to “%” the limit value refers to the nominal-rated current (primary side) of the feeder (parameter [0200]). The setting range is between 2.0 % and 999.9 %.

“mA”: If the unit “mA” is selected the parameters for the nominal-rated value of the feeder current and the ground current transformer values have no influence on the measured current.

1422. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1421]; if event [1421] has been activated and the set delay time is passed then event [1422] will be activated until the measured value falls below the limit of parameter [1421]. This parameter should be used for the alarm or output controller.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1421. – Limit [ 2000]A: 200.0 %


1423. - Pickup type (50G/N) :meas.Ig1+2

1424. – Inrush blocking : OFF

1425. – Io stab.start Imax/In : 1.50

1426. -stab.factor. : 0.25

1427. – CT saturation limit : 7.5

1420. Inst. Ground overcurr.

ANSI 50G/N Instant. overcurrent Setting range:

ON/OFF

2,0-2999,9 % oder 0-2999,9 mA

30-9999 ms

*

ON/OFF

1.0 - 20.0

0.01- 1.00

0.0 - 999.9

*means.Ignd1/means.Ig1+2/

means.Ignd/calculated

Service Manual


1423. - Pickup type (50G/N) : Three different pickup types for instantaneous ground overcurrent can be selected:

“meas.Ig1+2”: default setting; this parameter should not be changed.

“meas.Ignd1”: reserved

“meas.Ignd2”: reserved

1424. - Inrush blocking : The delay time of parameter [1422] can be extended if inrush conditions referring to ANSI 95i are detected.

Figure 3-41 Logic diagram for ANSI 50G/N

NOTE: Following parameters P[1425] bis P[1427] are only valid for the use of distance protection function ANSI 21!

1425. – Io stab.start Imax/In : 1426 –stab.factor :

As soon as one of the three phase currents exceeds the set value of parameter P[1425], the earth overcurrent will be stabilized according to the following algorithm:

IoStab = Io * (1 – P[1426] ((IPHmax2 – P[1425]2) / IPHmax

2)4)

with: Io: momentary measured earth current IoStab: stabilized earth current for protection purposes [50G, 51G, 67GS] IPHmax : maximum value of the measured phase currents IPh1…3

1427. CT-Saturation limit : As soon as one of the three phase currents exceeds the set value of parameter P[1427], the earth overcurrent alarm will be blocked.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.15 ANSI 51 – AC time overcurrent relay

AC time overcurrent relay is a relay that operates when its AC input current exceeds a predetermined value and when the input current and operating time are inversely related through a substantial portion of the performance range.

Figure 3-42 ANSI 51


1500. Time overcurrent relay : If the AC time overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If it is set to “RECLOSE” it closes the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1501. - Limit [xxxx]A : Limit setting of AC time overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1501] will be set.

1502. - Time multiplier (TMS) : Time multiplier setting for the corresponding curve shape (see parameter [1503]); if event [1501] is active and the delay time calculated with the time multiplier and the chosen curve shape is passed the event [1502] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1501]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1503. - Curve shape : Curve shape selection of AC time overcurrent; eight curve shapes (normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, curve D-F, INV-K and VINV-K) can be selected (see Appendix A5).

1504. - Reset characteristic : Reset characteristic of time overcurrent relay; if the calculated delay time is in process and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1501] then a special reset characteristic for the actual calculated delay time can be set with this parameter. The following characteristics are available: none, def./Th, depending, curve D-F (see also Appendix A5).

BACK EXIT

: ON

1501. – Limit [ 1000]A: 100.0 %

1502. – Time multiplier (TMS) : 1.00 s

1503. - Curve shape : very inv.

1504. – Reset characteristic : def./Th

1505. – 1.limit [ 1200]A: 110.0 %

1506. - Delay time (definite): 10.0 s

1507. – 2.limit [ 1400]A: 140.0 %


1509. – 3.limit [ 1800]A: 180.0 %


1511. – Reset character (Th) 0 s

1512. – Volt. Restrain [51VR] : OFF

1513. - - Volt. Low limit : 10 %

1514. – Dealy pickup in cycles: 10

1515. – Block protection by : 10 ev

1500. Time overcurrent relay

ANSI 51 AC time overcurrent Setting range:

ON/OFF/reclose

2,0-2999,9 %

0,03-10,00 sec

8 curve shapes (IDMT)

None,def./Th,dep.,curve D-F

2,0-2999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

2,0-2999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

2,0-2999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0-99 sec

ON/OFF

10-90 %

0-9999

0-9999 ev

Service Manual


In addition to the AC time overcurrent relay operating with inverse curve shapes, three further limits with definite times can be used (parameters [1505] to [1510]).

1505. - 1. limit [xxxx]A : First additional current limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1505] will be set.


1507. - 2. limit [xxxx]A : Second additional current limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1507] will be set.


1509. - 3. limit [xxxx]A : Third additional current limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1509] will be set.


1511. - Reset character (Th) : Holding time for reset characteristic if parameter [1504] is set to “def./Th”; if the calculated delay time is in process and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1501] then the calculated delay time is hold for this time.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1512. - Volt. restrain [51VR] : Parameter [1512] activates the voltage restrain function. If voltage restrain function is active the Current limits ([1501], [1505], [1507] and [1509]) will be reduced proportional to the relationship actual voltage to nominal voltage, as shown in the Figures 3-42 and 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Pickup value calculation curve of the voltage restrain function

1513. - Volt. low limit : The low voltage parameter limits the voltage restrain function to a minimum value (see Figure 3-42).

1514. - Delay pickup in cycles :

1515. - Block protection by : AC time overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [1515]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active.

0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%

Voltage

Cu

rve

Pic

ku

p M

ultip

lier

P 1513 Voltage low limit for ANSI 51

P 1513

Service Manual


Figure 3-44 Logic diagram for the AC time overcurrent protection

„1" E 1500 51 aktive

ANSI 51

off

on

reclose

³ 1

P 1501 51-TOC Pickup

3~

&

VR_EN


P 1503 IDMT Curve

P 1502 TMS

P 1505 51-1 Pickup

3~

VR_EN

P 1507 51-2 Pickup

3~

VR_EN

Voltage Restrain

on/off

on/off

Reclose

E 1502 51-TOC Trip

E 1506 51-1 Trip

E 51-2 Trip

³ 1

ANSI 79 Reclose

1504 Reset Char.

t

I

&


P 1506 51-1 Delay

1511 Reset Char.

&


P 1508 51-2 Delay

1511 Reset Char.

1508

&


P 1509 51-3 Pickup

3~

VR_EN

P 1510 51-3 Delay

1511 Reset Char.

E 51-3 Trip1510

on/off

on/off

on/off

Reclose

Reclose

Reclose

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.16 ANSI 51G/N – AC time ground overcurrent relay

Inverse time overcurrent protection 51G/N contains ANSI characteristic curves (IDMT). The permissible setting range of this relay is depending on the ordered hardware. Refer to the order information to get the right internal current transformers for your application.

Figure 3-45 ANSI 51G/N


1520. Time ground overcurrent : If the AC time ground overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1521. - Limit [xxxx] A : Limit setting of AC time ground overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1521] will be set.

1522. - Time multiplier (TMS) : Time multiplier setting for the corresponding curve shape (see parameter [1523]); if event [1521] is active and the delay time calculated with the time multiplier and the chosen curve shape is passed, the event [1522] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1521]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1523. - Curve shape : Curve shape selection of AC time ground overcurrent; eight curve shapes (normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, curve D-F, INV-K and VINV-K) can be selected (see Appendix A5).

1524. - Reset characteristic : Reset characteristic of time overcurrent relay; if the calculated delay time is in process and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1521] then a special reset characteristic for the actual calculated delay time can be set with this parameter. The following characteristics are available: none, def./Th, depending, curve D-F (see also Appendix A5).

1525. - Reset character (Th) : Holding time for reset characteristic if parameter [1524] is set to “def./Th”. If the calculated delay time is in process and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1521] then the calculated delay time is hold for this time.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1521. – Limit [ 1000]A: 100.0 %

1522. – Time multiplier (TMS) : 1.00 s


1524. – Reset characteristic : def./Th

1525. – Reset character (Th) : 0 sec

1526. - Pickup type (51G/N) :meas.Ignd1

1520. Time ground overcurrent

ANSI 51G/N AC time overcurrent Setting range:

ON/OFF

2,0-999,9 %

0,01-10 sec

8 curve shapes (IDMT)

None,def./Th,dep.,curve D-F

0-99 sec

meas.Ingd1/measIg1+2/meas.Ignd2/

calculated

Service Manual


1526. - Pickup type (51G/N) : Two different types of the AC time ground overcurrent pickup can be selected. The first one is measured and the second is calculated.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.17 ANSI 51 LR – Locked Rotor

Figure 3-46 ANSI 51 LR


1540. Locked rotor relay : If the locked rotor protection should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1541. - Starting current : During starting phase of the motor, the current will be limited with extremely inverse characteristic. The time multiplier Tm (see figure 3-46) will be calculated with the starting current [1541] and the starting time [1542]. The trip time formula for the extremely inverse characteristic is:

Tm value will be displayed in the last line.

1542. - Starting time : Because of the starting time, the time multiplier will be calculated. (see parameter [1542]). The stating phase will be limited by two times this setting. Use the event [1542] for a binary output or an alarm.

1543. - Locked rotor current : During the running state of the motor, the trip time characteristic is definite. If the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1543] will be set.

1544. - Locked rotor time : Time delay of event [1543]; if event [1543] is active and this delay time is passed the event [1544] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1543]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

80

1/]1541[*]1542[

1/

80*

2

2

InparameterparameterTm

InITmt

BACK EXIT

: ON

1541. – Starting current : 300.0 %

1542. – Starting time : 10.0 sec

1543. - Locked rotor current : 200.0%

1544. – Locked rotor time : 8.0 sec

Tm (calculated) = 1.00 sec

1540. Locked rotor relay

ANSI 51LR Locked rotor (motor) Setting range:

ON/OFF

10-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

10-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

Calculated from [1541]&[1542]

Service Manual


Figure 3-47 Inverse time characteristic during starting phase. The extremely inverse curve for trip time will be defined by parameters [1541] and [1542]

Figure 3-48 Definite time characteristic during running state of the motor. The time characteristic will be defined by parameters [1543] and [1544]

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

100000

Extremely Inverse Trip Time Characteristic

1 10 P.U2 20

t (S)

Start current Parameter [1541]

Starting time Parameter [1542]

51 LR Motor state: Starting

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

51LR Trip Time Characteristics

1 2 PU 6

51LR time Parameter [1544]

51 LR Motor state: Running

51 LR current Parameter [1543]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.18 ANSI 59 – Overvoltage relay

The overvoltage relay operates when the actual measured voltage is more than a pre-determined value. The overvoltage protection has the task of preventing insulation failure by protecting against abnormally high voltage levels. Abnormally high voltages often occur in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load shutdown of a generator from the system.

Figure 3-49 ANSI 59


1600. Overvoltage relay : If the overvoltage relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If it is set to “RECLOSE” it will close the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1601. - 1. Limit value : First overvoltage limit; the activation of this limit value depends on the curve shape selection of parameter [1603]:

“normal inverse”: If the actual measured voltage value plus 5% (k-factor) exceeds this limit event [1601] will be set.

“definite”: If the actual measured voltage value exceeds this limit event [1601] will be set. No k-factor will be calculated.

1602. - Time multiplier (TMS) :

Delay time setting for overvoltage 1. limit; the characteristic of the delay time depends on

the curve shape selection of parameter [1603]:

“normal inverse”: If normal inverse curve shape is selected this parameter will be used as time multiplier.

“definite”: If the curve shape is set to definite and if event [1601] is active, then a definite delay time will be activated.

Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1601. – 1. Limit value : 110.0 %

1602. – Time multiplier (TMS) : 1.00 sec

1603. - Curve shape : definite

1604. – reserved :

1605. – 2. Limit value : 110.0 %

1606. – Delay time (definite): 1.00 sec

1600. Overvoltage relay

ANSI 59 Overvoltage relay Setting range:

ON/OFF/reclose

1-999,9 %

0,01-10 sec

Normal inverse/definite

1-999,9 %

0,01-999,99 sec

Service Manual


1603. - Curve shape : Curve shape selection of overvoltage; one curve shape (normal inverse) and one definite limit can be selected. Parameter [1602] is the time multiplier if the normal inverse curve is selected. If this parameter is set to “definite” then a definite time delay can be activated.

1604. reserved :

1605. - 2. Limit value : Second overvoltage limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1605] will be set.

1606. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1605]; if event [1605] is active and this delay time is passed, the event [1606] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1605]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

Figure 3-50 Logic diagram for the overvoltage protection

„1" E 1600 59 aktive

ANSI 59

off

on

reclose

³ 1

P 1601 59-1 Pickup

&


0 T&

E 1605 Limit reached P 1606 50-2 Delay

0 T

E 1611 Limit reached P 1612 59N Delay

on/off

Reclose

on/offReclose

on/off

Reclose

E 1602 50-1 Trip

E 1606 59-2 Trip

E 1612 59-N Trip

³ 1

ANSI 79 Reclose

U >

3~

P 1605 59-2 Pickup

U >>

3~

P 1603 IDMT Curve

P 1602 TMS

„1"

ANSI 59N

off

on

reclose

³ 1

P 1611 59-1 Pickup

E 1610 59N aktive

U >

3~

&

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.19 ANSI 59 B – BUS overvoltage relay

There are two independent overvoltage relays for the BUS1 and BUS2 measure inputs available. The overvoltage relay operates when the actual measured voltage is more than a predetermined value. It prevents insulation failure by protecting against abnormally high voltage levels. Abnormally high voltages often occur in low-loaded long distance transmission lines, in isolated systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full-load shutdown of a generator from the system.

Figure 3-51 ANSI 59 B


The parameters for the BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in the following only the BUS1 parameters are described.

1610. BUS1 overvoltage relay : The enable switch for the overvoltage relay

1611. - Overvoltage 1. limit : First limit of the set point for overvoltage; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.


1613. - Overvoltage 2. limit : Second limit of the set point for overvoltage; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.


BACK EXIT

: ON

1611. – Overvoltage 1. limit : 103.0 %

1612. – Delay time (definite) : 8.0 sec

1613. - Overvoltage 2. limit : 110.0 %


1620. BUS2 overvoltage relay : OFF

1621. – Overvoltage 1. limit : 103.0 %

1622. - Delay time (definite): 8.0 sec

1623. - Overvoltage 2. limit : 110.0 %


1610. BUS1 overvoltage relay

ANSI 59B BUS Overvoltage relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

Service Manual


3.20 ANSI 64/59N – Overvoltage ground relay

Ground detector relay is a relay that operates on failure of machine or other apparatus insulation to

ground. Sensitive ground fault detection may be used in isolated or compensated systems to detect ground faults. In solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground fault detection is used to detect high impedance ground faults. Sensitive ground fault detection may be used for alarming and acoustic signaling or may be allowed to initiate tripping. By summation of the moment values of the single leak voltage (measured from the clip X1-17, 19 and 21) covered against the earth (case) the misalignment tension is calculated:

U0 = ⅓ |Ū1 + Ū2 + Ū3|.

Programmable timers are supplied to supervise the alarming and tripping. For this protection function the SYMAP® must be equipped with a sensitive input transformer. Because of its high sensitivity, ground fault detection is not suited for detection of high magnitude ground faults. The directional and non-directional overcurrent protection functions are preferred for this application.

Figure 3-52 ANSI 64


1700. Ground detector relay : If the ground detector relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1701. - Limit value Ugnd1 : First limit setting of ground overvoltage


1704. - Limit value Ugnd2 : Second limit setting of ground overvoltage

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1701. – Limit value Ugnd1 : 100.0 %


1703. reserved :


1705. - Delay time (definite) : 10.0 sec

1706. reserved :

1707. Overvoltage relay [59N] : OFF

1708. - 1.Limit value : 50.0 %


: OFF

1711. – min. active power : 0 %

1712. – min. voltage : 80 %

1713. - Limit Uo3rd (via 59N) : 20 %

1714. – Limit dir. Uo3rd : “>”

1715. – Limit Uo3rd (via Ug1) : 25 %

1716. – Limit dir. Uo3rd : “<”

1717. – Uo3rd(Ug1)/Uo3rd(59N) : 0 %

1718. - Delay time (definite) : 2,0 sec

1719. – Delay pickup (cycles) : 1

1728. – logic P[1713]-P[1715] : “AND”

1700. Ground detector relay

ANSI 64/59N Overvoltage ground relay Setting range:

ON/OFF/reclose

0,1-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

ON/OFF/reclose

0,1-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0-100 %

0-100 %

0-100 %

“<”,“>”

0-100 %

“<”,“>”

0-100 %

01-999,9 sec

0-99

“AND”,“OR”

1710. 100% Startor earth fault

Service Manual

SYMAP®



1707. Overvoltage relay [59N] : If the overvoltage relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1708. - 1. Limit value : Limit setting of displacement voltage; the voltage will be calculated from the measured three-phase system. Example: With a rated of 400 V and a strain of 10 % the permissible displacement voltage corresponds 40 V.


3.20.1 ANSI SEF - 100% Stator-Earthfault-Protection

This protection function captures winding-faults located close to the neutral point in synchronous generators with non-grounded neutral point.

Required measuring-inputs for protection function “100% Stator-Earthfault-Protection”

- displacement-voltage (U59N) derived from phase-to-ground voltages at the generator terminals SYMAP Y type: connector X1.9,11,13 SYMAP-BC type: connector X1.17,19,21

- Ground-voltage (UGND1), measured at connector X1.15,16 (all SYMAP types)

NOTE: With activation of 100% stator earth fault protection the second voltage input for ground measurement (UGND2) isn’t available.

Basics: The majority of all large generators is operated in earth-free voltage systems, often the generator is connected via a generator transformer. Earth fault detection cannot be reliably derived from current measurement under such conditions because of low ground capacities and consequently low earth-fault currents. The simplest fault recognition for the setup described above is derived from the displacement voltage between ground and the generator neutral point, which occurs when one of the phases comes in contact with ground potential. (see also ANSI 59N). The displacement voltage becomes lower when the ground fault is inside the generator. In order to keep fault-pickup safe, the trip voltage must be above a certain minimum. If the fault is in the part of the winding close to the neutral point, fault pickup becomes impossible by simple measurement of the displacement voltage. This is the reason for naming this protection „80% Stator Earth-Fault Protection“. In order to protect the part of the windings which are electrically close to the neutral point, the protection function „100% Stator-Earth-Fault-Protection“ (ANSI SEF) is used. Basically, this is an isolation-monitoring. For this purpose, a voltage with a frequency different from the mains frequency is applied between the neutral point of the generator and earth. By means of

G

Grid-Side ACB

Step-Up

Transformer

Generator

Breaker

Service Manual


a switched rectifier, the ground current at this frequency is measured and the isolation resistance is calculated. The main problem is, that the voltage source must endure the full displacement voltage in case of an external ground fault. The protection function ANSI SEF of SYMAP exploits a voltage that many generators produce a voltage suited for the purpose. The stator winding is not infinitely distributed along the stator bore, so without any remedy the output voltage would be a stair-shaped curve, which only imitated the required sine wave. In the frequency domain, this curve shape is represented by harmonic content at all un-even numbers. This means that beside the main frequency, the output voltage will contain voltages at the multiples of 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 times of the mains frequency. As a remedy, in machines with drum rotors, only two parameters are available: chorded winding and the skew factor of the windings. Each of these parameters can be used to eliminate one harmonic or reduce two harmonics in close neighbourhood. If the generator is not intended to be used with neutral point connected, the 3rd harmonic (and all other that can be divided by three), can be eliminated by a trick described below and the two „winding-factors“ can be used for higher harmonics, which gives an overall better approximation of the sine wave. The third harmonics in all three phases are actually in phase with each other, since the basic waves have an offset of 120° towards each other, whereas the time for this offset is exactly the time for a full cycle at threefold frequency. The result is that all three 3rd harmonics are in phase with each other:

Phase angle of third harmonic

1

0

-1

1

0

-1

1

0

-1

U

t

U1

U2

U3

U3rd1

U3rd2

U3rd3

U1 U2

U12 = U1-U2

U3

L3

L2

L1

Service Manual

SYMAP®


The phase-to-phase voltages of the three-phase system do not contain any third harmonic, when the generator is star-connected. The path between two generator terminals always contains two voltage-sources of third harmonic, one counting positive and one counting negative, thus cancelling each other. This applies also for all other harmonics that can be divided by three. This is the reason why all major generators are star-connected1) and the neutral point is not connected to the system. Exceptions are only found in low voltage generators designed for single-phase load. The earth capacities of the generator winding, the generator bus duct and the generator transformer result in a capacitive grounding of the third harmonic system, which has it’s “centre of gravity” between the electrical middle of the generator (with open terminals) and the output terminals of the generator (with high capacity components like cables connected to the gernerator).

As a result, a healthy generator has a third harmonic displacement voltage which can be measured between neutral point and ground. In most systems, a resulting displacement voltage is also found on the output terminals.

1) In delta-connection, the third harmonic voltages would drive third harmonic currents, leading to

extra losses in the windings.

neutral point

3rd harm

3rd

harm

3rd harm

3rd

harm

3rd harm

3rd

harm

neutral point

Service Manual


In case of an earth fault between the „centre of gravity“ of the ground capacities and the neutral point, the 3rd harmonic voltage between the neutral point and ground (UGND1) will be reduced. Simultaneously, the 3rd harmonic voltage at the power terminals of the generator (U59N) will increase.

3rd

harm

3rd

harm

U59N

UGND1

neutral point

Other than the name suggests, this protection function only monitors the part of the winding that is not monitored by the “80% Stator Earth Fault Protection”. Faults located near the “centre of gravity” of the ground capacities cannot be captured. A full protection can only be achieved in combination with the protection function ANSI 59N.

Technical implementation of the protection function in SYMAP SYMAP internally calculates the 3rd harmonic content of the displacement voltage2) U59N (calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages on the generator power terminals, and of the ground voltage UGND1, measured between generator neutral point and ground. SYMAP derives the protection functions ANSI SEF from these two voltages.

The 3rd harmonic content of the generator’s phase voltages depends on the design and the centre of gravity of the ground capacities depend on the ground capacities of the generator and on the

2 ) SYMAP® contains a switched rectifier which transfers only signals of third harmonic.

PT

UGND1

U=U59N

Service Manual

SYMAP®


properties of the loads connected to it. Therefore the settings for this protection function need to be adapted to the situation found on the machine after installation. This protection function is not recommended for generators that are galvanically connected to extended grids with variable ground capacity because of changing operation modes. This protection function will not work for generators that are designed for having the neutral point grounded since these generators will have only very small content of 3rd harmonic voltage. In systems with a low impedance connection between generator neutral point and ground, stator earth fault protection (80% - ANSI 59N as well as 100% - ANSI SEF) is not effective, instead differential protection should be used.

Figure 3-53 ANSI SEF

Decription of Parameters:

1710. 100% Stator earth fault : If this parameter is ON, the 100% stator earth fault is active. If the parameter is OFF, the 100% stator earth fault is disabled.

1711. - min active power : Minimum active power The parameter “minimum power” can be set, when the protection function is required only in power operation (for example because of drastic changes in ground capacities between generator breaker ON and OFF), The value should be set as low as possible in order to ensure early availability, but high enough to make pickup reliable. A value of 5% of generator nominal power is a fair compromise. When this parameter is set to „0“ (recommended), the protection function will be always active independent of the generator output power. An alternative way to take the generator breaker into consideration is to utilise the SYMAP internal logic builder and set up an AND-link with the “breaker ON”-signal.

BACK EXIT

: OFF



1703. reserved :


1705. - Delay time (definite) : 10.0 sec

1706. reserved :

1707. Overvoltage relay [59N] : OFF

1708. - 1.Limit value : 50.0 %


: OFF

1711. – min. active power : 0 %

1712. – min. voltage : 80 %

1713. - Limit Uo3rd (via 59N) : 20 %

1714. – Limit dir. Uo3rd : “>”

1715. – Limit Uo3rd (via Ug1) : 25 %

1716. – Limit dir. Uo3rd : “<”

1717. – Uo3rd(Ug1)/Uo3rd(59N) : 0 %


1719. – Delay pickup (cycles) : 1

1728. – logic P[1713]-P[1715] : “AND”

1700. Ground detector relay

ANSI 64/59N Overvoltage ground relay Setting range:

ON/OFF/reclose

0,1-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

ON/OFF/reclose

0,1-999,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0-100 %

0-100 %

0-100 %

“<”,“>”

0-100 %

“<”,“>”

0-100 %

01-999,9 sec

0-99

“AND”,“OR”

1710. 100% Startor earth fault

Service Manual


1712. - min voltage : Minimum voltage The pickup of the protection function is based on a “limit low”-condition of third harmonic voltage (or a ratio derived from this voltage). Therefore, this protection function may only be activated when the generator is excited and running. This parameter is a requisite condition for reliable protection. The minimum voltage is the percentage of actual RMS voltage compared to nominal voltage, at which the protection function is activated. Recommended value is 85 – 90%. If a permanent operation of the generator at reduced voltage is intended, lower values should be set, but the reduced voltage level shall also be taken into account setting the protection thresholds (parameters [1713 and 1715]). When this parameter is set to „0“ (not recommended), the protection function will be always active independent of the generator output voltage.

1713. - Limit Uo3rd (via 59N) : 3rd harmonic displacement voltage at the generator output terminals The voltage on the generator output terminals alone is not a reliable indication of healthy or faulty condition of the generator, but it can be used as supporting information (safeguard against over-function) for the protection according to parameter[1715] or as an auxiliary solution when the neutral-to-ground voltage is not accessible. The voltage value is derived from internal calculations, using the three phase-to-ground voltages as an input. PTs must be installed for all three voltages. The PTs shall be designed for permanent operation at the voltage level found in case of an external earth-fault in the system (phase-to-phase voltage of the system for a phase-to-ground PT!). All known PTs based on transformer technology have a sufficient frequency response for this protection function. The qualification of PTs based on capacitive or other technologies shall be evaluated in each individual case. In general, the highest level of the 3rd harmonic displacement voltage at the generator output terminals is found when the generators circuit breaker is OFF. This protection function will normally be activated when the value exceeds a set maximum value. For setting this parameter, the voltage level should be observed during setting to work of the system and the limit value derived from the values found. The recommended value is app. 150% of the highest voltage found in healthy operation. A lower maximum value will give protection for a bigger part of the windings. On the other hand, a low value may lead to over-activity. If this function is used as a an add-on for protection according to parameter[1715], the limit can be set between 120 and 150%. Parameter[1713] is set as a percentage, the 100%-value is the system nominal voltage as set in parameter[201] in the paramter group „nominals“. If the pickup shall be set to “yyy V” (RMS-value), the value for parameter[1713] is calculated as follows:

%100*]201[

]1713[Parameter

yyyV .

Parameter[201] is the RMS-value of the phase-to-phase voltage of the system. When parameter[1713] is set to „0“, this pickup-condition is always TRUE.

1714. - Limit dir. Uo3rd (via 59N): This parameter defines if pickup shall be activated above or below the limit value according to parameter[1713]). The value “>” is recommended.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1715. - Limit Uo3rd (via Ug1) : The displacement voltage between generator neutral point and ground can give a good pickup of ground-faults in the 25% of the winding that is next to the neutral point. For this criterion a PT is required between the generator neutral point and ground. The PTs shall be designed for permanent operation at the voltage level found in case of an external earth-fault in the system (phase-to-ground voltage of the system for this PT!). All known PTs based on transformer technology have a sufficient frequency response for this protection function. The qualification of PTs based on capacitive or other technologies shall be evaluated in each individual case. In general, the lowest level of the 3rd harmonic displacement voltage at the generator neutral point is found when the generators circuit breaker is OFF. This protection function will normally be activated when the value falls below a set minimum value. For setting this parameter, the voltage level should be observed during setting to work of the system and the limit value derived from the values found. The recommended value is app. 30-60% of the lowest voltage found in healthy operation. A higher minimum value will give protection for a bigger part of the windings. On the other hand, a high value may lead to over-activity. If this function is used in addition to protection according to parameter[1713], the limit can be set at 80% of the lowest voltage found in healthy operation. Parameter[1715] is set as a percentage, the 100%-value is the system nominal voltage as set in parameter[201] in the paramter group „nominals“. If the pickup shall be set to “yyy V” (RMS-value), the value for parameter[1713] is calculated as follows:

.

Parameter[201] is the RMS-value of the phase-to-phase voltage of the system. When parameter[1713] is set to „0“, this pickup-condition is always TRUE.

1716. - Limit dir. Uo3rd (via Ug1): This parameter defines if pickup shall be activated above or below the limit value according to parameter[1713]). The value “<” is recommended.

1717. – Uo3rd(Ug1)/Uo3rd(59N): Ratio of the voltages according to parameter[1715] und parameter[1713] As explained before, in the event of an earth fault in the part of the winding next to the neutral point, the 3rd harmonic voltage between neutral point an ground will be reduced and the 3rd harmonic voltage on the output terminals will rise. When a generator circuit breaker is installed, in breaker OFF condition the ratio will be app. 100%. With breaker ON, the 3rd harmonic voltage on the output terminals will be reduced and the 3rd harmonic voltage between neutral point and ground will rise. The ration will be higher than 100%. In case of a winding-to-ground fault in the lower half of the winding (between middle and neutral point), the ration will drop below 100%. The ratio is the only parameter that can be set independent of machine design, a recommended value is between 50 and 80%. When the step-up transformer is permanently connected to the generator (no generator side circuit breaker installed), a value above 100% can be set, if the ratio found at setting to work is permanently higher. A higher minimum value will give protection for a bigger part of the windings. On the other hand, a high value may lead to over-activity. Parameter[1717] is a ratio of two voltages and is entered in %.

%100*]201[

]1713[Parameter

yyyV

Service Manual


The pickup is always activated when the ratio falls below the set value (no direction parameter available). When parameter[1717] is set to „0“, this pickup-condition is always TRUE.

1718. - delay time (definte) Trip delay time If the pickup is actually activated after the pickup-delay-time (parameter[1719]), it will be because a damage to the generator windings has already occurred. The mission of this protection function is only to minimise the extent of the damage. In earth-free systems, the ground-fault currents are low, so a comparatively long delay time can be accepted without undue additional damage. Remark: This protection function is not applicable in systems with low-impedance grounding, instead a differential protection is recommended. If the pickup is revoked during delay time, the timer will be reset. A high delay-time increases reliability against over-activity. In most cases this protection function will be used to generate only an alarm, then a delay-time of 1 s will be of no consequence and is recommended. In case that automatic action is derived from the protection function, at least 100 ms delay time is recommended. In calculating the total trip time, the trip delay time (parameter[1718]) is added to the pickup delay time (parameter[1719]) and the relay intrinsic time. The intrinsic time is app. 40 ms. The protection function has a cycle-time of 20 ms. It must be expected that the fault occurs right after one cycle is complete. Then detection will take two function cycles, or 40 ms.

1719. -pickup delay time (cycles) Pickup delay time, counted in cycles SYMAP calculates the 3rd harmonic voltages after complete cycles of the mains voltage (20 ms at 50 Hz, 16,7 ms at 60 Hz). Some transient events in the grid contain 3rd harmonic voltages, for example switching transients or transformer inrush. In order to avoid frequent pickup events, a stabilisation can be set. The pickup delay is the number of consecutive measuring cycles for which the pickup condition must be TRUE in order to enter the pickup event and FALSE in order to leave the pickup event. This delay is used to keep the event history free of unnecessary entries. Recommended values are between 2 and 20. In very noisy systems, higher values are required.

1728. -logic P[1713]-P[1715] This parameter decides whether the conditions of parameter [1713] and [1715] or if it is sufficient to have only one of them active pickup of function ANSI100SEF. (See logic within Pic.2)

Measuring precision As described earlier, the voltages used fort his protection function are derived from the input values by switched rectification. Therefore, in comparison with the RMS-based functions, the measuring precision is reduced. Under normal conditions (negligible content of harmonics higher than 6th), a precision of app. 1.5% with respect to input nominal voltage (parameter[201]) is achieved. The ratio of the voltages Ugnd1 and U59N is respectively tolerated at app. 2%-points, based on the assumption that a major proportion of the error is common-mode to both voltages.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Summary For detection of changes in the 3rd harmonic voltages, three functions are available:

1. Neutral point displacement voltage, parameter[1715]. 2. Measurement of three phase-to-ground voltages at the generator output terminals; the

relay calculates the resulting displacement-voltage, parameter[1713] 3. Ratio of the voltages according to 1. and 2. calculated in the relay, , parameter[1717]

The pickup condition will be TRUE when all three above conditions are TRUE, and additionally the auxiliary pickup conditions active power, parameter[1711] and generator voltage, parameter[1712] are TRUE. The pickup event will become TRUE after a number of consecutive measuring cycles (set in parameter[1719] are TRUE. The trip event will become true after the pickup event is TRUE for a time set by parameter[1718].

Figure 3-54 Logic diagram for 100% Stator Earth Fault protection (ANSI SEF)

P[1711] = 0 1

Wirkleistung > P[1711]

P[1712] = 0 1

Spannung > P[1712]

P[1713] = 0 1

U03rd >/< P[1713]

P[1715] = 0

U03rd (Ug1) >/< P[1715]

U03rd (Ug1)

U03rd (U59N)

P[1717] = 0 1

< P[1717]

P[1710] = „ON“&

P[1719]

E[1717]

P[1718]

E[1718]

Trip

1

&P[1728] = „OR“

1

Service Manual


3.21 ANSI 66 – Start Inhibit for Motors

Figure 3-55 ANSI 66


1720. Start inhibit relay : If the start inhibit relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1721. - Allow time : Defines the period of time in which a number of start attempts are allowed

1722. - Allowed starts :

Number of starts which are allowed within the period of time (parameter [1721])

1723. - Limit time : After the last motor start, the limit time has to be passed before a new start is allowed.

1724. - Thermal limit (0d) : If the thermal load of the motor is higher then this thermal limit no further start attempt is allowed.

1725. - Event for SI : If one of the above conditions for start inhibit (parameters [1721] to [1723]) is fulfilled event [1725] start inhibit will be activated and the SI window in the LCD-display will appear.

NOTE: The events [1721], [1723] and [1724] are only listed in the event history after event [1725] is active and the ON-key is pressed.

Figure 3-56 Start inhibit for motors – overview

Actual number of starts ³ Allowed starts/allow time

Limit time [1723] after last start attempt active

³1

Start Inhibit [SI]

Event E[1725]Actual thermal lead > thermal limit [1724]

BACK EXIT

: OFF

1721. – Allow time : 30,0 min

1722. – Allowed starts : 2

1723. - Limit time : 20,0 min

1724. – Thermal limit (0d) : 55 %

1725. – Event für SI

1720. Start inhibit relay

ANSI 66 Start inhibit for motors Einstellungsbereiche:

ON/OFF

1-999,9 min

1-50

1-999,8 min

1-100 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.22 ANSI 67 – AC Directional Overcurrent Relay

AC directional overcurrent relay is a relay that functions on a desired value of AC overcurrent

flowing in a predetermined direction.

When the directional overcurrent stage exceeds the current setting (parameter [1801]) and if the

directional operation has been selected then the directional criteria should activate event [1801].

After the time delay, event [1802] will be activated. These events can be used to activate the alarm

controller and the binary outputs. The operation of the directional overcurrent stage is based on a definite time or inverse time characteristic. This mode of operation is set with parameter [1803]. At definite time mode of operation, the operating time is set in 10 msec steps. At inverse time mode of operation (I.D.M.T.), six internally standardized and two special type time/current characteristics are available. The operation stage starts if the current on one of the phases exceeds the setting value and if the phase angle between the current and base angle falls within the operation sector +/- 60° and if the phase angle is selected at parameter [1807]. The directional control is based on measuring the phase current and the phase voltage. The phase voltage is recalculated from the line voltage, which means that earth influences at the phase voltage are eliminated.

Figure 3-57 ANSI 67


1800. AC dir. overcurrent [67] : If the AC directional overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1801. - Limit value [xxxx]A : Limit setting of AC directional overcurrent relay; if one of the three phase currents (I1-I3) exceeds this limit event [1801] will be activated.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1801. – Limit value [ 1000]A : 100,0 %

1802. – Time multiplier (TMS) : 1,00 sec


1804. – Reset charcteristic : def./Th

1805. – Reset character (Th) : 0 sec

1806. – Current direction : reverse

1807. - Phase angle :- 0°

1808. – Voltage low limit : 8 %

1809. – delay pickup in cycles: 8

1830. – block protection by : 10

1800. AC dir.overcurrent [67]

ANSI 67 AC directional overcurrent Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,1-999,9 %

0,01-10 sec

*

**

0-99 sec

Reverse/forward/angle

-180 bis +180

0-999 %

0-9999

0-9999

* norm. Inv./very inv./

extr. Inv./curve D/ curve E/

curve F/INV-K/VINV-K/

definite

**none,def./Th,dep./depending/

curve D/curve E/curve F)

Service Manual


1802.- Time multiplier (TMS) : Delay time for directional overcurrent; depending on parameter [1803]; this parameter can be used as time multiplier for inverse time characteristics or for definite delay time.

Time multiplier: Event [1801] is active and the delay time calculated with the time multiplier and the chosen curve shape (parameter [1803]) is passed, then event [1802] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1801].

Definite delay time: If the event [1801] is active and this definite delay time is passed then event [1802] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1801]. Please use parameter [1802] for the alarm or output controller.

1803. - Curve shape : Curve shape selection of AC directional overcurrent; eight curve shapes (normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, curve D-F, INV-K and VINV-K) can be selected (see Appendix A5).

1804. - Reset characteristic : Reset characteristic of AC directional overcurrent relay; if the calculated delay time has been activated and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1801] then a special reset characteristic for the actual calculated delay time can be set with this parameter. The following characteristics are available: none, def./Th, depending, curve D-F (see also Appendix A5).

1805. - Reset character. (Th) : Holding time for reset characteristic if parameter [1804] is set to “def./Th”. If the calculated delay time has been activated and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1801] then the calculated delay time will be on hold for this time.

1806. - Current direction : The operational direction of the directional stage can be selected to be “forward”, “reverse” or “angle”, which means the operational sector will be defined with the angle definition of parameter [1807] +/-60°.

Figure 3-58 Operation sector when parameter [1806] is set to “reverse”

U1 IL1

Reverse

direction

U3 U2

Non operational Sector

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 3-59 Operation sector when parameter [1806] is set to “forward”

Figure 3-60 Operational sector when parameter [1806] is set to “angle” and Parameter [1807] is set to -45°

1807. - phase angle :

If the operational direction of the directional stage is selected with “angle” the operational

sector is defined with this parameter +/- 60°.

1808. - voltage low limit : Minimum voltage for relay operation; to secure a reliable relay function, the voltage limit of this parameter must be exceeded to activate the protection function and to determine the angle between voltage and current.

Figure 3-61 Criteria for ANSI 67 trip

U1 IL1

U2 U3 Non operational Sector

+60°

-60° φParameter [1807] = -45°

U1 IL1

Forward

direction

U3 U2 Non operational Sector

Phase current > Parameter P[1801]

Phasen current within operating area Parameter P[1806]

≥1

ANSI 67 – „Trip“

Event E[1802]

Phase voltage > Parameter P[1808]

Delay time

Parameter P[1802]

Service Manual


Figure 3-62 Logic diagram for the AC directional overcurrent protection

„1" E 1800 67-TOC active

ANSI 67-TOC

off

on

&

3~

VR_EN

E 1801 Limit reached P 1803 IDMT Curve

P 1802 TMS

Voltage Restrain

on/off

P 1806 67-TOC Direction

P 1801 67-TOC Pichup

„1"

P 1805 Reset Char. Th.

P 1804 Reset Char.

E 1802 67-TOC Trip

„1" E 1808 67 N/G/Gs activer

ANSI 67 N/G/Gs

off

on

3~

P 1815 67 N/G/Gs Type

P 1814 67 N/G/Gs Direction

P 1809 67 N/G/Gs Pickup

&

E 1809 Limit reached P 1811 IDMT Curve

P 1810 TMS

P 1813 Reset Char. Th.

P 1812 Reset Char.

E 1810 67 N/G/Gs Trip

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.23 ANSI 67GS/GD – AC directional ground overcurrent relay

The AC directional ground overcurrent relay is a relay that functions on a desired value of AC ground overcurrent flowing in a predetermined direction.

The permissible setting range of this relay depends upon the hardware. Refer to the purchase information of the hardware to get the appropriate internal current transformers.

Required measuring inputs (pick up) for ANSI67GS/GD protection:

Ground current input “IG1”, connector X1

4. Ground voltage input “UG”, connector X1

ATTENTION: ANSI 67GS is only available if the protection device is equipped with a sensitive earth current measuring input!

Figure 3-63 ANSI 67GS/GD


1810. AC direction.[67GS/GD] : If the AC dir. ground overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1811. - Limit value [Ignd1] : Limit setting of AC directional ground overcurrent; the unit of this limit is mA instead of a percentage. Through this unit very small values can be set (e.g. if a ZCT is in use). If the ground current exceeds this limit value event [1811] will be activated.

1812. - Max. limit value (no dir.) : Maximum limit setting of AC directional ground overcurrent; if the ground current exceeds these limit value events [1811] and [1812] will be activated. These events will in turn activate the Delay Timer [1813] without checking the directional conditions. To disable the maximum limit supervision set this parameter to zero.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1811. – Limit valU[eiGND1] : 1.5 mA

1812. – Max. limit (no dir.) : 4.0 mA


1814. – Volt. Low limit [Vo1] : 10 %

1815. – Phase angle[E+/-60] :- 55 deg

1816. – delay pickup in cycles: 0

1817. – block protection by : 0 ev.

1810. AC direction. [67GS]

ANSI 67GS/GD AC dir. Ground overcurrent Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,1-6000,0 mA or 2.0-2999.9 %

0,1-6000,0 mA or 2.0-2999.9 %

0,01-99,99 sec

1-999 %

0-360°

1-9999

1-9999

Service Manual


1813.- Delay time (definite) :

The delay timer for the directional ground overcurrent relay will be activated if the

following criteria are fulfilled:

The ground (neutral) current exceeds the limit value of parameter [1811].

The ground (residual) voltage exceeds the limit value of parameter [1814].

The phase angle φ is within the operating range given with Parameter [1815] +/-60°.

The timer will also be activated when the ground current exceeds the limit value of parameter [1812]. If the delay time is passed then event [1813] will be activated as long as the above criteria are fulfilled. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1814. - volt. Low limit [Vo1] : Limit setting for ground voltage; if the ground voltage exceeds this limit the protection relay will be activated. To secure reliable relay operation at extremely low ground voltage, a memory function has been implemented. At sudden loss of ground voltage in a fault situation, this memory function gives the directional stage an additional 3 seconds time to operate after loss of voltage (ground voltage below parameter [1814]).

1815. - Phase angle [+/-60°] : Definition of the operating area of the directional ground current relay; the operating area is defined by this phase angel (Io to Uo) plus 60° degrees in both directions. If the actual phase angle of the ground current in relation to the ground voltage is within the operating area then the protection relay will be activated (see also figures 3-61 and 3-62).

Figure 3-64 Operation characteristic when the phase angle φp = +90°

φ p[1815]

I0

U0

non operational Sector

±60°

I0 LIMIT [1811]

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 3-65 Operation characteristic when the phase angle φp = 0°

1816. - delay pickup in cycles : If the conditions for the directional overcurrent relay are fulfilled then the pickup events [1811] or [1813] will be activated. The delay of the pickup can be cycle wise increased by this parameter.

1817. - block protection by : AC directional ground overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [1817]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active.

U0 I0 φ

non operational Sector

I0 LIMIT [1811]

±60°

Service Manual


3.24 ANSI 78 – Vector surge / dF/dt / dP/dt supervision relay

Figure 3-66 ANSI 78


1840. Vector surge superv. : To activate the vector surge supervision, set parameter [1840] to “ON”, otherwise to “OFF”.

1841. - limit for phase jump : If a phase jump is higher than the limit set in parameter [1841] is detected than event [1841] will be activated. This event triggers the current flow check. Do not use this event to activate a relay output, since the active state of this event is too short. If no current increase check is needed use event [1842] for activating a relay output. In this case, set parameter [1842] to zero.

1842. - current increase : After a phase jump (event [1841]) is detected, the current flow check will be activated. If this parameter is set to zero event [1842] will be activated immediately. Otherwise if the current flow after the following cycle exceeds the limit set in parameter [1841] then event [1842] will be activated. Use this event number to activate a relay output.

1843. reserved : Not in use

1844. - minimum voltage : If the feeder voltage exceeds the limit set in parameter [1844] then the vector surge supervision (parameters [1841] and [1842]) and the dF/dt supervision (parameters [1845] and [1846]) will be activated after a two seconds delay.

BACK EXIT

: ON

1841. – limit for phase jump : 0 deg

1842. – current increaase : 0.0 %

1843. reserved:

1844. – minimum voltage : 90.0 %

1845.dF/dt supervision dF/sec : 5.00 Hz

1846. – delay time (definite): 0.10 sec

1860.dP/dt supervisio : ON

1861. – min. pickup delay : 0.10 sec

1862. - (+)dP/sec: 10.0 %


1864. - (-)dP/sec: 10.0 %


1840. Vector surge superv.

ANSI 78 Vector surge supervision Setting range:

ON/OFF

0-360 deg

0,0-999,9 %

0,0- 99,9 %

0,00-99,99 Hz

0,00-99,99 sec

ON/OFF

0,00-99,99 sec

0,0- 99,9 %

0,00-99,99 sec

0,0- 99,9 %

0,00-99,99 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1845.dF/dt supervision dF/sec : Limit value for the dF/dt supervision; if the frequency changes per second exceed the limit value set in parameter [1845] event [1845] will be activated as long as the frequency changes are below this limit. The dF/dt supervision can be switched off if this value is set to zero.

Example: The allowed frequency change per 100 ms is 0.5 Hz. That means the frequency change per second is 5 Hz. This limit value should be set with parameter [1845].

=> 0.5 Hz/100 ms = 5 Hz/1 s

1846. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1845]; if event [1845] is active and this delay time is passed, event [1846] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1845]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1860. dP/dt supervision : To activate the dynamic load supervision, set parameter [1860] to “ON”, otherwise to “OFF

1861. - min. pickup delay : General pick up delay time for dynamic load supervision.This time delays the pick up for the positive and the negative dynamic load supervision.

1862. - (+)dP/sec : Limit value for the positive dP/dt supervision; if the positive load changes per second exceed the limit value set in parameter [1862] event [1862] will be activated as long as the load changes are below this limit.

Example: The allowed load change per 250 ms is 5.0% (of nominal power). That means the load change per second is 20%. This limit value should be set with parameter [1862].

=>5.0 %/250 ms = 20% per second

1863. - delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1862]; if event [1862] is active and this delay time is passed, event [1863] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1862]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1864. - (-)dP/sec : Limit value for the negative dP/dt supervision; if the negative load changes per second exceed the limit value set in parameter [1864] event [1864] will be activated as long as the load changes are below this limit.

Example: The allowed load change per 200 ms is 6.0% (of nominal power). That means the load change per second is 30%. This limit value should be set with parameter [1864].

=>6.0 %/200 ms = 30% per second

1865. - delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [1864]; if event [1864] is active and this delay time is passed, event [1865] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1864]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

Service Manual


3.25 ANSI 78 S Out-of-step tripping

Figure 3-67 ANSI 78 S


1850. Out-of-step tripping : To activate the Out-of-step tripping supervision, set parameter [1850] to “ON”, otherwise to “OFF”.

1851. - limit reverse power : Low limit setting of Out-of-step tripping supervision; if the active power of the generator exceeds this limit value the out-of-step supervision will be activated. This means the supervision period timer will be started if it has not already been activated.

1852. reserved : Reserved parameter

1853. - limit high act. power : High limit setting of out-of-step tripping supervision; if the supervision period timer is running (see parameter [1851]) and the active power of the generator exceeds this limit the positive amplitude of the out-of-step tripping supervision will be registered. An out-of-step period is complete if during the supervision time (parameter [1857]) the high limit and the low limit (parameters [1851] and [1853]) are detected.


1855. - number of periods :

Maximum number of periods for out-of-step tripping; if the count of out-of-step periods

reaches this limit then the trip condition has been reached and event [1855] will be activated.

This event remains active as long as during the next supervision period no out-of-step

conditions are measured. Please use this parameter number for the alarm or output

controller.


BACK EXIT

: ON

1851. – limit reverse power : 5,0 %

1852. reserved:

1853. – limit high act.power : 75,0 %

1854. reserved:

1855. – number of period : 4

1856. reserved:

1857. -holding time of pickup: 0,0

1850. Out of step tripping

ANSI 78 S Out of step tripping Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,0-99,9 %

0,0-199,9 %

0-100

0,1-999,9 sec

Service Manual

SYMAP®


1857. -holding time of pickup :

Maximum supervision time for an out-of-step period; if the supervision timer has run down

without detecting another out-of-step condition, the period counter will be set to zero.

0%

„limit reverse power“ P[1851] = -10%

100%

t

Active power P

„limit high act. power“ P[1853] = 60%

t

„holding time of pickup“ P[1857] = 30s

t1

2

3

4„number of periods“ P[1855] =

t

t

„ANSI 78S pickup“ E[1853]

„ANSI 78S trip“ E[1855]

P>0

P<0: reverse power!

0

Figure 3-68 Example for ANSI 78 S out-of-step tripping

Explanation of the diagram:

1. The active power of the generator exceeds the “limit reverse power” P[1851] and so the timer for out-of-step period supervision “holding time of pickup” P[1857] has been started.

2. The active power of the generator exceeds the “limit high act. power” P[1853]. This is another criterion for the out-of-step period.

3. The active power of the generator exceeds the “limit reverse power” P[1851] again. The out-of-step condition has been reached, since a whole power swing period has been gained before the “holding time of pickup” P[1857] has run down. The out-of-step counter “number of periods “ P[1855] will be increased by one, and event “ANSI 78S pickup” E[1853] becomes active. Subsequently, the next power swing period will be supervised.

Service Manual


4. The number of out-of-step periods has reached the maximum “number of periods” P[1855]), thus event “ANSI 78S trip” E[1855] will be activated.

5. If timer for out-of-step period supervision runs down without detecting another out-of-step period, the events “ANSI 78S pickup” E[1853] and “ANSI 78S trip” E[1855] will be deactivated. The out-of-step counter will be reset.

NOTE: The timer for out-of-step period supervision will be activated, only if the active power falls below the “limit reverse power“ P[1851].

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.26 ANSI 79 – AC reclosing relay

AC reclosing relay is a relay that controls the automatic reclosing and locking out of an AC circuit

breaker. From experience, the majority of faults associated with overhead distribution feeders are temporary in nature. Therefore, to maximize service availability, it is desirable to employ a system that will close the circuit breaker shortly after it is tripped. This is accomplished in the SYMAP® via the automatic reclosing system. When the automatic reclosing system is used if the fault still exists after the circuit breaker has been reclosed, then the protective elements will re-trip the circuit breaker. Depending on the number of reclosing attempts programmed for the automatic reclosing system (up to nine are possible), the circuit breaker will either be reclosed again, or it will remain open. The automatic reclosing function is typically utilized only in situations in which the occurrence of temporary faults is anticipated. Therefore, the automatic reclosing system is not applied when the SYMAP® is used to protect generators, motors, transformers, and cables. The automatic reclosing function can also be initiated by an external protection relay. For this application, an output contact from the tripping relay must be wired to a binary input of the SYMAP®. It is also possible to allow the SYMAP® to work in conjunction with an external reclosing device.

Initiation of the automatic reclosing function can be caused by internal protective functions or externally using a binary input. Each of the following elements may initiate the automatic reclosing function:

ANSI 50-1, 50-2, 50-r, 51, 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC

The automatic reclosing system can be programmed so that any of the elements above can initiate, not initiate, or block reclosing. If an element initiates reclosing the appropriate reclosing program is executed.

Figure 3-69 ANSI 79

BACK EXIT

: ON

1901. – Reclaim time : 20,0 sec

1902. - Reclosing trials : 3

1903. – 1. Reclosing time : 250 ms

1904. – 2. Reclosing time : 3,0 sec








1912. - Blocking via event : 0

1913. - Initiate via event : 0

1914. - CB reclose event

1915. -Reclose event duration: 100 ms

1916. -Reclose success event

1917. -Reclose fail event

1900. AC reclosing relay

ANSI 79 AC reclosing relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,1-999,9 sec

0-999

0-9999 ms

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-999,9 sec

Event number

Event number

0-9999 ms

Service Manual



1900. AC reclosing relay : If the AC reclosing relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1901. - Reclaim time : The reclaim time is the setting of the maximum time of the whole reclosure attempt.

1902. - Reclosing trials : Setting of the maximum numbers of reclosures shots

1903. - 1. Reclosing time : Setting of the first reclosing time

1904. - 2. Reclosing time : Setting of the second reclosing time

1905. - 3. Reclosing time : Setting of the third reclosing time

1906. - 4. Reclosing time : Setting of the forth reclosing time

1907. - 5. Reclosing time : Setting of the fifth reclosing time

1908. - 6. Reclosing time : Setting of the sixth reclosing time

1909. - 7. Reclosing time : Setting of the seventh reclosing time

1910. - 8. Reclosing time : Setting of the eighth reclosing time

1911. - 9. Reclosing time : Setting of the ninth reclosing time

1912. - Blocking via event : The breaker reclosure command can be blocked by entering the belonging event number. All other functions of ANSI 79 are active.

1913. - Initiate via event : A reclosure shot can be initiated by entering the selected event number. That is only possible when the reclose time is active only.

1914. - CB reclose event . This event will drive the breaker over a binary output.

1915. - Reclose event duration : The duration is responsible for the length of pulse time of the reclosure shot.

1916. - Reclose success event .

1917. - Reclose fail event .

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 3-70 Timing diagram for a second successful reclosure

Figure 3-71 Timing diagram for two unsuccessful reclosing shots

Trip Command

Breaker Status

Reclosing Commandduration

[1915]

1. Reclosing Time

2. Reclosing Time

Reclaim Time

CLOSE

OPEN

Trip Command

Breaker Status

Reclosing Commandduration

[1915]

1. Reclosing Time

2. Reclosing Time

Reclaim Time

CLOSE

OPEN

Service Manual


3.27 ANSI 81 – Frequency relay

Frequency relay is a relay that responds to the frequency of an electrical quantity and operates when the frequency or rate of change of frequency exceeds or is less than a predetermined value. The frequency is measured from the feeder voltage.

The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system. If the

frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as load shedding

or separating a generator from the system. A decrease in system frequency occurs when the system

experiences an increase in the real power demand or when a malfunction occurs with a generator

governor or automatic generation control (AGC) system. An increase in system frequency occurs

when large blocks of load are removed from the system or again when a malfunction occurs with a

generator governor or AGC system. Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the

frequency evaluation is free from harmonic influences and very accurate.

Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. Two given frequency element can be set

to pickup for overfrequency and two for underfrequency conditions. Each element can be

independently set and utilized to perform different functions within the system.

The frequency can be determined as long as the positive sequence voltages are present and of

sufficient magnitude. If the measurement voltage drops below a settable value (parameter [2012])

then frequency protection is blocked. For elements used in an underfrequency protection mode, as

soon as the frequency of the measured voltage decreases below the setting, the element picks up and

remains picked up until the system frequency increases above the setting. For elements used in an

overfrequency protection mode, as soon as the frequency of the measured voltage increases above

the setting, the element picks up and remains picked up until the frequency decreases below the

setting.

Figure 3-72 ANSI 81

BACK EXIT

: OFF

2001. Overfreq. 1.step limit : 102,0 %


2003. reserved:

2004. Overfreq. 2.step limit : 104,0 %


2006. reserved:

2007. Underfreq. 1.step limit: 98,0 %


2009. reserved:

2010. Underfreq. 2.step limit: 86,0 %


2012. Undervoltage blocking : 0,0 %

2000. Frequency relay

ANSI 81 Frequency relay Setting range:

ON/OFF/CB ON

100,0-199,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

100,0-199,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-99,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-99,9 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,1-99,9 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®



2000. Frequency relay : This parameter activates the frequency supervision, whereby:


“ON”: activates and

“CB ON”: activates the underfrequency supervision only if the circuit breaker is switched on.

2001.Overfreq. 1.step limit : Limit setting of definite overfrequency

2002. - Delay time (defnite) : Time delay of event [2001]; use this event to activate an output.

2003. reserved :

2004. Overfreq. 2.step limit : Limit setting of definite overfrequency


2006. reserved :

2007. Underfreq. 1.step limit : Limit setting of definite underfrequency


2009. reserved :

2010. Underfreq. 2.step limit : Limit setting of definite underfrequency


2012. Undervoltage blocking : This parameter depends on the device type.

Device type BC or X: When the feeder voltage is lower than this setting the underfrequency protection function is disabled.

Device type BCG or XG: This parameter is not active since the underfrequency relay works when the main breaker is on, otherwise it is blocked.

Service Manual


Figure 3-73 Logicdiagram for the frequency protection

„1" E 2000 81 aktive

ANSI 81

off

on³ 1

Startup

U > 3 ~

P 2012 Setting

S1

RReset

Q

&f >

3~

P 2001 81-1 Pickup

0 T

E 2001 Limit reached P 2002 81-1 Dealy

E 2002 81-1 Trip

&f >>

3~

P 2004 81-2 Pickup

0 T


E 2005 81-2 Trip

&f <

3~

P 2007 81-3 Pickup

0 T


E 2008 81-3 Trip

&f <<

3~

P 2010 81-4 Pickup

0 T


E 2011 81-4 Trip

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.28 ANSI 81 B – BUS frequency relay

There are two independent frequency relays for the BUS1 and BUS2 measure inputs available.

Figure 3-74 ANSI 81 B-1

Figure 3-75 ANSI 81 B-2


The parameters for the BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in the following only the BUS1 parameters are described:

2020. BUS1 frequency relay : The enable switch for the frequency relay

2021. - Overfrequency 1.limit : First limit of the set point for overfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarm pre-warning.

BACK EXIT

: ON

2021.- Overfrequency 1.limit : 102,0 %

2022. – Delay (definite): 8,0 sec



2025.- Underfrequency 1.limit: 98,0 %




2029.- Minimum startvoltage : 30,0 %

2030.BUS2 frequency relay : ON


2020.BUS1 frequency relay

ANSI 81B Bus frequency relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

BACK EXIT








2039.- Minimum startvoltage : 25,0 %

ANSI 81B Bus frequency relay Setting range:

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

0,0-999,9 %

Service Manual


2022. - delay (definite) : Time delay of event [2021]; use the event [2022] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

2023.- Overfrequency 2.limit : Second limit of the set point for overfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.

2024. - delay (defnite) : Time delay of event [2023]; use the event [2024] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

2025. - Underfrequency 1.limit : First limit of the set point for underfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.


2027. - Underfrequency 2.limit : Second limit of the set point for underfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarm prewarning.


2029. - Minimum startvoltage . If the startvoltage is reached by all 3 phases the frequency relay remains always active until power on reset.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.29 ANSI 86 – Lockout relay

Lockout relay is a reset auxiliary relay that is operated manually upon the occurrence of abnormal

conditions to maintain associated equipment or devices inoperative until it is reset.

Figure 3-76 ANSI 86


2090. Operate as Flip-Flop? : If the lockout relay should be activated set it to “ON”. The lockout function of the binary output –X2.1/16, 17 (event [0702]) is active. This relay output is working as a normal binary output in case the failure lockout relay is switched off. Otherwise, it can be used as S/R-flip-flop (see figure 3-70).

2091. - reset by event : This event initiates a reset of the failure lockout relay output in case the release of the output is no longer active. This function is comparable with a SR-Register.

2092. lockout set (stored) :

Figure 3-77 Logic diagram for the lockout relay function

1. Event ≥1

[0703]

&

2. Event

3. Event

4. Event

5. Event

6. Event

S

R

Q

Parameter

P[2091]

Parameter

P[2090]

E[0702]

Binary Output Event E[0702]

NACK EXIT

: NO

2091. - reset by event : 9999

2092. – lockout set (stored)

2090. Operate as Flip-Flop?

ANSI 86 Lockout relay Setting range:

NO/YES

0-9999

Service Manual


3.30 ANSI 87 – Differential protection relay

Differential protection relay is a relay that functions on a percentage or phase angle or other

quantitative difference of two currents or of some other electrical quantities.

Figure 3-78 ANSI 87


2100. Diff. protective relay : This parameter activates the differential protection, whereby:


“ON”: activates and

“CB ON”: activates the differential protection only when the circuit breaker has been switched on.

2101. - Diff. Limit [xxxx]A : Limit setting of definite differential protection; if the actual measured current difference exceeds this limit event [2101] will be activated.

2102. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [2101]; if event [2101] has been activated and the delay time is passed then event [2102] will remain activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [2101]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

2103. - Angle compensation :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with transformer differential protection!

In case of transformer application, the angle compensation can be activated. Table 3-1 shows the possible settings and the corresponding phase shifts (Iprim/Isec) of the different transformer types.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

2101.- Diff. Limit [ 200]A : 20.0 %

2102.– Dealy time (definite) : 0.15 sec

2103.- Angle compensation : Dy1

2104.- reserved :

2105.- power flow for 87LD : forward

2106.- min. voltage for 87LD : 0,0 %

2107.- Inrush blocking : ON

2108.- Bias limit : 10.0 %

2109.- Zero compensation : OFF

2110.- delay pickup in cycles: 1

2111.- block protection by : 0 ev.

2112.- reserved :

2100.Diff. Protective relay

ANSI 87 Differential protection Setting range:

ON/OFF

1,0-99,9 %

0,03-999,99 sec

None,Dy1,Dy5,Dy7,Dy11,Yd1…

forward/reverse

1,0-99,9 %

ON/OFF

1,0-99,9 %

ON/OFF

0-9999

0-9999

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Table 3-1 Vector group matching

Transformer type

Phase shift Iprim to Isec (deg)

Transformer type

Phase shift Iprim to Isec (deg)

NONE 0

Dy1 30 Dd0 0

Dy5 150 Dd2 60

Dy7 210 Dd4 120

Dy11 330 Dd6 180

Yd1 30 Dd8 240

Yd5 150 Dd10 300

Yd7 210 Yy0 0

Yd11 330 Yy6 180

Dy11d0 y11 : Iprim to Isec1 :330° ; Isec1 = Id1 (X1.7-12) LCD: IS1 d0 : Iprim to Isec2 : 0° ; Isec2 = Id2 (X1.13-16) LCD: IS2

Yy6d5 y6 : Iprim to Isec1 : 180° ; Isec1 = Id2 (X1.13-16) LCD: IS2 d5 : Iprim to Isec2 : 150° ; Isec2 = Id1 (X1.7-12) LCD: IS1

Yy0d1 Y0 : Iprim to Isec1 : 0° ; Isec1 = Id2 (X1.13-16) LCD: IS2 d1 : Iprim to Isec2 : 30° ; Isec2 = Id1 (X1.7-12) LCD: IS1

2104. reserved :

2105.- power flow for 87LD :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with line differential protection!

Definition of the power flow; the direction of the power flow will be transferred via the communication line. The status of the power flow is used to compare the RMS-values of the feeder phase currents with the received currents values (RMS) of the partner device. This function is activated when parameter [2106] is unequal to zero.

2106. - min. voltage for 87LD :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with line differential protection!

The operation of the line differential protection is influenced in the following ways:

“0%”: The line differential protection is always active. Only the RMS-values of both devices are compared.

“1%” – “99%”: The line differential protection function is blocked when a minimum of one feeder voltage is zero or under the limit value. If the feeder voltage is higher than this limit the protection function will be released, the power flow status of each phase will be calculated and transferred to the partner device.

2107. - Inrush blocking : The delay time of parameter [2102] can be extended if inrush conditions referring to ANSI 95i settings are detected. The condition of the inrush can be set within the parameter group “ANSI 95i inrush blocking”.

2108. - Bias limit : If the actual measured feeder current exceeds the nominal value a spread factor will be calculated, increasing the limit of parameter [2101]. Figure 3-76 shows the formula and the characteristic of the bias factor:

Service Manual


Figure 3-79 Formula and characteristic of the bias factor

2109. - Zero compensation :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with transformer differential protection!

This parameter activates the zero compensation. In case of start-connection of transformer (e.g. Dyn 11 with connected neutral line) the y-connected side will be zero compensated. Therefore the sum of all momentary phase current values will be calculated. This neutral current will be used to reduce the measured current difference of the transformer.

2110. - delay pickup in cycles : If the actual measured difference current is higher then the limit setting of definite differential protection (parameter [2101]) the pickup of this protection relay will be activated. The delay of the pickup can be cycle wise (at fn = 50 Hz: 20 ms, at fn=60 Hz: 16,7 ms) increased by this parameter.

Example: Rated frequency = 50 Hz. Parameter [2110] = 3 => Pickup delay time: 3 × 20 ms = 60 ms.

2111. - block protection by : Differential protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [2111]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active.

2112. - reserved :

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

diffe

ren

tia

l p

rote

ctio

n lim

it in

[%

] o

f In

Calculation of actual differential protection limit mit factor:

diff. limit = parameter [2101] + parameter [2101] x

parameter [2108]/100 x (I/In -1)

whereby:

parameter [2101]: diff.limit [ANSI 87]

parameter [2108]: bias factor (in percent)

bias = 50,0%

bias = 40,0%

bias = 30,0%

bias = 20,0%

bias = 10,0%

ANSI 87 [bias factor]

I/In

Setpoint diff. limit: [2101] = 20.0%

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 3-77 shows a CT-connection example for the ANSI 87 protection relay.

Figure 3-80 CT-connection for ANSI 87

G/M

3

P1

P2P1

P2P1

P2

1

2

3

4

5

6

13

14IG1

I3

I2

I1

IISO15

AVR

Rotor insulation

P1

P2P1

P2P1

P2

7

8

9

10

11

12ID3

ID2

ID1

CT

CT

X1 = Type 3 CMA 199 – 3/13

SYMAP®-BC_connection_ANSI 87N

CT-connection

X 1

Service Manual


3.31 ANSI 87LD – Line Differential Protection

The line differential protection supervises a line section through current differential measurement. Therefore 2 devices on both line ends are necessary. Both devices are measuring the 3 phase line current. Over fibre optic, or copper pilot wire, the measuring values will be transmitted, and the difference values calculated. In the case of over limits, both circuit breakers on the cable end will be tripped.

Connection example for fibre optic

with: IA: Line current measured in station A IB: Line current measured in station B ID: Differential current IA- IB

LWL: Fiber optic; Communication interface between A and B

Figure 3-81 Line Differential Protection – fibre optic connection

k l klStation A

Device B

Protection area

Tranzfer lineIA IB

Device A

Station B

LWL (max.: 40 km)

Mode *Max. Distance

Line/Core

Singlemode 40 km 9/125 µm Multimode 2,5 km 62,5/125 µm

Max. Distance on patch numbers.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Connection example for copper connection

with: IA: Line current measured in station A IB: Line current measured in station B ID: Differential current IA- IB

LD-copper: Copper line; communication interface between Device A and B

Figure 3-82 Line Differential Protection – copper pilot wiring

Table 3-2 LD copper connection

Mode Min.Baud rate

Type /line cross section *Max. Distance

Load resistance

Multi mode

125KBd/s Copper Nym line/1,5mm² 400m

RT=120Ω Twisted and blinded line 0,5mm²

700m

* the longer the distance, the smaller the baud rate

Measuring method

Both devices measure the three phase current and voltage on both line ends. Via this dates, the

devices calculate value and direction of each phase current. This data’s will be transmitted over the

fibre optics or copper wire to the other side. After accurate transmission the differential currents

will be calculated. For the case of faulty communication the protection will be immediately

blocked.

Communication [system parameter/03 communication] Both, fibre optic and copper connection will be activated by communication parameter (serial port 2):


0322. SERIAL PORT (ASC2) : Engaging of the serial port for the fibre optic, and the copper connection.

Station A

Protection device B

Protection area

TranzferlineIA IB

LD-cooper line (max.: 700m)

29a

28a

29

28

29a

28a

29

28

120 120 Protection decice A

Station B

Service Manual


0323. -address : Communication address; within the fibre optic and the copper connection the decive should have address numbers 1 and 2.

0324. -baud rate : Bit rate; the baud rate of the fibre optic communication needs to be adjusted on min. 89300 Baud (bit/sec), and for the copper communication min. 125000 Baud (bit/sec). A higher bit rate improves the result of the differential current measurement, due to the fact, that the relative time delay for the protocol exchange will be limited. This parameter needs to be similar for both devices.

After adjusting the communication parameter, both devices will establish a connection. Therefore the device with the No.1 will send a protocol with the measurement values to device 2 all 16-20ms. After successful receive of the protocol, the device 2 will answer with an own protocol. The line differential protection will be blocked, if within 20ms no protocol will be received. The event [0324] will be activated, if more than 10 protocols will be lost consecutively. After 2 min. communication error, the system alarm „3041. ACC2 bus off“ will be activated. .

Calibration parameter Via the calibration parameter hardware components will be activated. The following calibrating parameters are important for the line differential protection.


0067. Diff. Current input : Activation of the differential protection; over engaging „LINE DIFF“ the operating system will be prepared in that way, that the currents for the differential calculation will be transmitted over the fibre optic, or copper connection.

0060. Current direction : Definition of the current direction; for current measuring in one similar direction (see k and l designation in figure 1.1), the direction of both devices needs to be adjusted on „forward“. If both devices are measuring into the protection zone, one device needs to be adjusted on „forward“, the other one on „reverse“.

Protection parameter

For line differential protection the parameter „ANSI 87 Differential protection“ needs to be chosen.

The following parameters are available.


2100. Diff. Protection relay : Protection function activate/ deactivate; for activation of the line differential protection, put the parameter „ON“.

2101. - Diff. limit [ 80]A : Limit for differential protection. If the diff. current exceeds this limit, the differential protection will be started and event no. [2101] activated; (difference of the instantaneous current values from device A and B inclusive the power flow). For secure function of this limit min. 60ms are necessary.

2102. - Delay time (definite) : Delay time; exceeding of this time period activate the event [2102]. This event no. should be used for function outputs or alarms.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


2103. - 2104. These parameters are not used.

2105. - power flow for 87LD : Definition of the power flow; this parameter is similar to the calibration parameter [0060], however this parameter refers just on the direction of the differential protection. All further directional protection functions will be not affected.

2106. - min. voltage for 87LD : Min. line voltage for enabling the line differential protection; all 3 line voltage needs to be above this limit, for activation of the line differential protection.

2106. - Inrush blocking : Inrush blocking; if an „inrush“ is detected“, the inrush blocking from parameter [2102] could be used. Therefore the relays „ANSI 95i inrush blocking „ needs to be activated. All necessary criteria for the detection of an inrush could be adjusted in this parameter group, in order to extend the time limits.

2107. - Bias limit : Adjustment of the stabilizaation current; if the line current is above the nominal current, (Parameter [0200]), the Parameter [2101] enables to extend the value depending the current value. See „bias limit“ table service manual, chapter 1.2.28.

2108. - Zero compensation : This parameter is not used.

Service Manual


3.32 ANSI 87 N – Restrict earth fault relay

Restrict earth fault relay is a protective relay that functions on a percentage difference of two

currents or of some other electrical quantities.

Figure 3-83 ANSI 87 N


2120. Restr.earth fault :

“OFF”: restrict earth fault relay is inactive.

“ON”: restricted earth fault relay is active. The fault current will be calculated referring to figure 3-81

“ON PRIMARY”: restricted earth fault relay is active. The fault current will be calculated referring to figure 3-82

2121. - Limit value [xxxx]A : Limit setting of definite differential protection


2123. - Delay CT-saturation : If the differential current transformer is operating in saturation the protection function (ANSI 87 N) will be blocked. After returning to the normal CT range, this delay time has to expire to activate the protection function again.

2124. - Inrush blocking : The delay time of parameter [2122] can be extended if inrush conditions referring to ANSI 95i settings are detected.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

2121. – Limit value [ 50]A: 5,0 %

2122. – Dealy time (definite): 0,3 sec

2123. – Dealy CT-saturation : 1,0 sec

2124. – Inrush blocking : ON

2120. Restr.earth fault

ANSI 87N Restrict earth fault relay Setting range:

ON/OFF/ON PRIMARY

0,0-999,9 %

0,1-9999,9 sec

0,1-9999,9 sec

ON/OFF

Service Manual

SYMAP®


NOTE: The transformer winding ratio and transformer CT current on the secondary side will be taken from ANSI 87 parameters [2104] and [2105].

Restricted earth fault for Transformer application Parameter [2120] = “ON”

Figure 3-84 Restricted earth fault for Transformer application

P1

P2P1

P2P1

P2

1

2

3

4

5

6

13

14IG1

I3

I2

I1

P1

P2P1

P2P1

P2

7

8

9

10

11

12ID3

ID2

ID1

CTSec

CTPrim

X1 = Type 5 CMA 199 – 4/14

CT-Cooection

P1

P2

15

16IG2

Calculation for the fault

current:

I87N = ID1 + ID2 + ID3 - IG2

X 1

X 1

N L1 L2 L3

Service Manual


Restricted earth fault for Generator/Motor application Parameter [2120] = “ON PRIMARY”

Figure 3-85 Restricted earth fault for Generator/Motor application

P1

P2P1

P2P1

P2

1

2

3

4

5

6I3

I2

I1

CTgnd

CTPrim

CT-connection

P1

P2

13

14

IG1

Calculation for the

fault current:

I87N = I1 + I2 + I3 - IG1

X 1

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.33 ANSI 94 – Supervision relay

Figure 3-86 ANSI 94


2220. Shunt #1 circuit superv. :

“OFF”: the supervision is inactive.

“CB ON”: the supervision is active if the CB is closed and the Shunt#1 is inactive (the coil is open).

“ON”: the supervision is active if the Shunt#1 is inactive (the coil is open).

2221. - Undervoltage limit : Setting of the undervoltage alarm limit for the nominal aux. voltage of the shunt trip #1 circuit


2223. Shunt#2 circuit superv. :

“OFF”: the supervision is inactive.

“CB OFF”: the supervision is active if the CB is open and the Shunt#2 is inactive (the coil is open).

“ON”: the supervision is active if the Shunt#2 is inactive (the coil is open).

2224. - Undervoltage limit : Setting of the undervoltage alarm limit for the nominal aux. voltage of the shunt trip #2 circuit


2226. Aux. power supervision : Enable switch.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

2221. – Undervoltage limit : 80,0 %


2223. Shunt#2 circuit superv. : OFF

2224. – Undervoltage limit : 80,0 %


2226. Aux. Power supervision : ON

2227. – Overvoltage limit : 120,0 %

2228. – Delay time (definite) : 10,0 sec

2229. - Undervoltage limit : 80,0 %

2230. – Delay time (definite) : 10,0 sec

2220. Shunt#1 circuit super.

ANSI 94 Supervission relay Setting range:

OFF/CB ON/ON

0,0-100,0 %

0,1-999,9 sec

OFF/CB ON/ON

0,0-100,0 %

0,1-999,9 sec

OFF/ON

0,0-200,0 %

0,1-999,9 sec

0,0-200,0 %

0,1-999,9 sec

Service Manual


2227. - Overvoltage limit : Setting of the overvoltage alarm limit for the nominal aux. voltage of the aux. power circuit.


2229. - Undervoltage limit : Setting of the undervoltage alarm limit for the nominal aux.voltage of the aux. power circuit.

2230. - Delay time (definite) : Time delay of event [2232]. Use this event to activate an output.

Figures 3-84 and 3-85 show the DC application for breaker coil supervision.

Figure 3-87 DC application – Working principle to connect the SYMAP® to DC breaker coils

Free-wheeling diode

+

-

Binary output of SYMAP

®

For DC use of contacts from SYMAP

®, the relay coils must have

a free-wheeling diode in parallel.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


Figure 3-88 DC-application – Connection of SYMAP®for DC breaker coil supervision

Figures 3-86 show the AC application for breaker coil supervision.

~

~

SYMAP®

OFF ON

18

19

20

21

Shunt 1:

Terminals 18 and 19 for „Trip“

Resistor:

R = 15 X ROFF coil

Resistor:

R = 15 X RON coil

Control voltage: 24 - 250V AC

Figure 3-89 AC-Application – Connection of SYMAP®for AC breaker coil supervision

Free-wheeling diodes

+

-

SYMAP®

OFF ON

18

19

20

21

Shunt 1:

Terminal 18 and 19 for „Trip“

Resistor:

R = 15 X ROFF coil

Resistor:

R = 15 X RON coil

Control voltge: 24 - 250V DC

Service Manual


Figures 3-87 and 3-88 show the logical diagrams for shunt trip supervision and auxiliary power (control voltage) supervision.

Figure 3-90 Logic diagram for the shunt trip supervision

Figure 3-91 Logic diagram for the aux. power supervision

„1" E 2200 94-1 aktive

ANSIN 94-1

Shunt Trip #1

off

on

P 2221 Nom. Aux. Voltage

CB closed

&

U <0 T


E 2223 94-1 Trip

P 2222 94-1 Pickup

„1" E 2224 94-2 aktive

ANSIN 94-2

Shunt Trip #2

off

on

P 2225 Nom. Aux. Voltage

CB closed

&

U <0 T


E 2227 94-4 Trip

P 2226 94-2 Pickup

„1" E 2228 94-3 aktive

ANSIN 94-3

Aux. Power

off

on

P 2229 Uaux nominal input

&

U >

0 T

E 2230 Limit reached P 2231 94-3 U > Delay

E 2231 94-3 U > Trip

P 2230 94-3 Overvolrage Pickup

&

U <

0 T

E 2232 Limit reached P 2233 94-3 U < Delay

E 2233 94-3 U < Trip

P 2232 94-3 Undervolrage Pickup

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.34 ANSI 95 i – Inrush blocking relay

When the SYMAP® is installed to protect a power transformer, large magnetizing inrush currents will flow when the transformer is energized. These inrush currents may be several times the nominal transformer current and depending on the transformer size and design, may last from several milliseconds to several seconds.

Although pickup of the relay elements is based only on the fundamental harmonic component of the

measured currents, false device pickup due to inrush is still a potential problem since, depending on

the transformer size and design, the fundamental harmonic comprises a large component of the

inrush current.

The SYMAP® features an integrated inrush restraint function that may be utilized when the device is installed at or near a transformer. It supervises the “normal” tripping of all directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements with the exception of the ANSI 67 and ANSI 67GS/GD relay elements. For example, when a transformer is energized the current levels may exceed the normal pickup of the overcurrent elements set in the device. If inrush conditions are identified (the 2nd harmonic content of current exceeds the value of setting at parameter [2302]) special inrush messages are created within the device that will block tripping of the overcurrent elements. Note that only the tripping elements are affected by harmonic inrush detection, the pickup values and corresponding timers continue to operate normally. Inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic component which is nearly absent during a short-circuit fault. Inrush current detection, therefore, is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic component present during inrush conditions. For frequency analysis, digital filters are used to conduct a Fourier analysis of all three phase currents and the ground current. As soon as the second harmonic component of the current flowing in a specific phase or ground relay element exceeds a set value, tripping is blocked for that element (does not apply ANSI 67, and ANSI 67GS/GD elements). Since quantitative analysis of the harmonic components of the current flowing through a specific relay element cannot be completed until a full cycle of inrush current has been measured, inrush restraint blocking and the associated inrush detection message is automatically delayed by one cycle. However, it is important to note that the tripping time delays associated with the relay elements are started immediately after pickup of the relay element, even if the inrush conditions are detected. If inrush blocking drops out during the time delay tripping will occur when the time delay of the element elapses. If inrush blocking drops out after the time delay has elapsed tripping will occur immediately. Therefore, utilization of the inrush restraint feature will not result in any additional tripping delays. If a relay element drops out during inrush blocking the associated time delay will reset.

Service Manual


Figure 3-92 ANSI 95 i


2300. Inrush blocking relay : If the inrush blocking relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

2301. - limit of DC-portion : Limit setting of DC-portion of the measured current value

2302. - 2. harmonic content : Limit setting of 2nd. harmonic content of the measured current value

2303. - Te extension time : Measuring interval for inrush check

2304. - Tmax blocking time : Maximum inrush blocking time

2305. - Imax blocking inrush : If the measured current exceeds this limit the inrush blocking function will be switched off.

BACK EXIT

: OFF

2301. – limit of DC-portion : 10,0 %

2302. – 2. harmonic content : 20 %

2303. – Te extension time : 100 ms

2304. – Tmax blocking time : 0,20 sec

2305. – Tmax blocking inrush : 1600 %

2300. Inrush blocking relay

ANSI 94i Inrush blocking relay Setting range:

ON/OFF

1,0-99,9 %

1-99 %

30-9999 ms

0,03-99,99 sec

1-2999 %

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.35 ANSI FF – Fuse failure (voltages)

There are three independent fuse failure relays for the generator, BUS1 and BUS2 voltage measure inputs available. The fuse failure protection monitors the displacement voltage Uo and the phase voltages U1, U2 and U3. For every relay three independent limits are available. The user can define own combinations of these three limits. Limits which are not used should be set to zero. The delay will only start to run if all enabled limits are reached.

NOTE: The Fuse failure relays should not be used for ungrounded systems.

Figure 3-93 ANSI FF


The parameters for the generator, BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in the following only the generator parameters are described.

2310. GENERATOR fuse failure : The enable switch for this Fuse failure relay

2311. - Uo limit : This limit will be supervised if the set value is unequal zero. The displacement voltage is calculated from the phase voltages U1, U2 and U3. The percentage is calculated from parameter P[0201].

Example:

P [2311] (22.5%) * P [0201] (400V) / √3 = 51.9 V

Event [2311] is activated if the displacement voltage reaches this limit and all other enabled limits are reached.

BACK EXIT

: ON

2311. – Uo limit : 22.5 %

2312. – low voltage limit : 8.3 %

2313. – high voltage limit: 95.6 %

2314. – delay (definite) : 3.0 sec

2320. BUS 1 fuse failure : OFF

2321. – Uo limit : 30.0 %




2330. BUS 3 fuse failure : OFF

2331. – Uo limit : 35.0 %




2310. GENERATOR fuse failure

FF Fuse failure (voltages) Setting range:

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

ON/OFF

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

Service Manual


2312. - low voltage limit : This limit will be supervised if the set value is unequal zero. The percentage is calculated from parameter P[0201].

Example:

P [2312](8.3%) * P [0201](400V) / √3 = 19.1 V

Event [2312] is activated if one of the three phase voltages U1, U2 or U3 reaches this limit and all other enabled limits are reached.

2313. - high voltage limit : This limit will be supervised if the set value is unequal zero. The percentage is calculated from parameter P[0201].

Example:

P [2313](95.6%) * P [0201](400V) / √3 = 220.7 V

Event [2313] is activated if one of the three phase voltages U1, U2 or U3 reaches this limit and all other enabled limits are reached.

2314. - delay (definite) : Use this event to activate a binary output and an alarm. This event is active if a combination of the three limits is logically true and the delay is passed. The enabled limits are logically AND associated. In the table 3-3 all seven possible combinations of enabled limits are listed:

Table 3-3 Combinations of enabled limits

Uo limit Low limit High limit

1 X

2 X

3 X

4 X X

5 X X

6 X X

7 X X X

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.36 Auxiliary limits

With these 8 auxiliary limits the user can define further events for his own applications. The time delays of these limits are not as exact as the delay time of the ANSI devices. All these limits will be checked two times per second, so they have an accuracy of 500 ms.

Figure 3-94 Auxiliary limits-1

Figure 3-95 Auxiliary limits-2


2340. CURRENT (avg) - 1. limit : The enable switch for this auxiliary limit:

“OFF”: This limit is disabled.

“LOW”: The limit is reached if the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [2341]

“HIGH”: The limit is reached if the actual value is higher than the limit of parameter [2341]

BACK EXIT

2340. CURRENT(avg) – 1. limit: OFF

2341. – limit: 0.0 %

2342. – delay: 0.0 sec

2343. – 2. limit: OFF

2344. – limit: 0.0 %

2345. – delay: 0.0 sec

2346. VOLTAGE(avg) – 1. limit: OFF

2347. – limit: 0.0 %

2348. – delay: 0.0 sec

2349. – 2. limit: OFF

2350. – limit: 0.0 %

2351. – delay: 0.0 sec

AUXILIARY LIMITS Setting range:

OFF/LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

OFF/LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

OFF/LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

OFF/LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

BACK EXIT

2352. POWER (sun) – 1. limit: OFF

2353. – limit: 0.0 %

2354. – delay: 0.0 sec

2355. – 2. limit: OFF

2356. – limit: 0.0 %

2357. – delay: 0.0 sec

2358. FREQUENCY – 1. limit: OFF

2359. – limit: 0.0 %

2360. – delay: 0.0 sec

2361. – 2. limit: OFF

2362. – limit: 0.0 %

2363. – delay: 0.0 sec

AUXILIARY LIMITS Setting range:

OFF/LOW/HIGH/REV-H/CAP-H/IND-H

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

OFF/LOW/HIGH/REV-H/CAP-H/IND-H

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

OFF/LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

OFF/LOW/HIGH

0,0-999,9 %

0,0-999,9 sec

Service Manual


2341. - limit : The percentage is calculated from parameter [0200]. Event [2341] is activated if the average current reaches this limit.

2342. - delay : This event is active if the limit is reached and the delay is passed.

2343. - 2. limit : to

2345. - delay : See the 1. Current limit

2346. VOLTAGE (avg) - 1. limit : to

2351. - delay : The voltage limits are identical as the current limits with the exception that the percentage is calculated from parameter [0201].

2352. POWER (sum) - 1. limit : The enable switch for this auxiliary limit:

“OFF”: This limit is disabled.

“LOW”: The limit is reached if the active power falls below the limit of parameter [2353].

“HIGH”: The limit is reached if the active power is higher than the limit of parameter [2353].

“REV-H”: The limit is reached if the reverse power is higher than the limit of parameter [2353].

“CAP-H”: The limit is reached if the reactive cap. power is higher than the limit of parameter [2353].

“IND-H”: The limit is reached if the reactive ind. power is higher than the limit of parameter [2353].

2353. - limit : The percentage is calculated from parameter [0202]. Event [2353] is activated if the actual value reaches this limit.

2354. - delay : This event is active if the limit is reached and the delay is passed.

2355. - 2. limit : to

2357. - delay : See the 1. Power limit

2358. FREQUENCY - 1. limit : to

2363. - delay : The frequency limits are identical as the current or voltage limits with the exception that the percentage is calculated from parameter [0203].

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.37 ANSI CW Contact wear measurement

The Contact wear measurement can be used to get a statistic supervision of the wear of the contacts (due to switching operations) of a circuit breaker.

Figure 3-96 Contact wear measurement-1


BACK EXIT

1930.Contact wear measurement: ON

1931. –sum of sw. Current L1 : 730 kA



1934. –sum of contact wear L1: 16.42 %



1937. –switching cycles : 835

1938. –max switching cycles : 7500

1939. –sw. current 1.limit : 7500 kA



Contact wear measurement Setting range:

OFF/ON

0-65500 kA

0-65500 kA

0-65500 kA

0,00-650,00 %

0,00-650,00 %

0,00-650,00 %

0-65500

0-65500

0-65500 kA

0-65500 kA

0-65500 kA

BACK EXIT

1942. -sw. current 4.limit : 8300 kA

1943. –contact wear 1.limit : 85.50 %




1947. –switch cycles 1.limit : 7000




1951. – min.switching current: 1.00 kA

1952. – max. CO cycles : 10000

1953. –1.switching current : 2.00 kA


0-65500 kA

0,00-650,00 %

0,00-650,00 %

0,00-650,00 %

0,00-650,00 %

0-65500

0-65500

0-65500

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

Service Manual





BACK EXIT

1954. -1.max. CO cycles : 4500


1956. –2.max. CO cycles : 3000


1958. –3.max. CO cycles : 2300


1960. –4.max. CO cycles : 1800


1962. –5.max. CO cycles : 1450


1964. –6.max. CO cycles : 1200



0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

BACK EXIT

1966. -7.max. CO cycles : 1000


1968. –8.max. CO cycles : 850


1970. –9.max. CO cycles : 740


1972. –10.max. CO cycles : 600


1974. –11.max. CO cycles : 490


1976. –12.max. CO cycles : 400



0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

BACK EXIT

1978. -13.max. CO cycles : 330


1980. –14.max. CO cycles : 270


1982. –15.max. CO cycles : 230


1984. –16.max. CO cycles : 190

1985. –Timeout counter cycles: 800 ms

1986.Temp/current supervision: OFF

1987. – recprd cycle time : 0 min

1988. – current average time : 0 min


0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0,00-650,00 kA

0-65500

0-65500 ms

OFF/ON

0-60000 min

0-1440 min

Service Manual

SYMAP®



1930. Contact wear measurement : The enable switch for this function

On every switching cycle (OFF->ON) of the circuit breaker, the actual phase currents are measured and the contact wear for every phase is calculated (according to a curve, which can be defined with 16 points). The values for the currents, the contact wear and the cycles are then integrated (summed) on the corresponding integrators (parameters [1931] to [1937]).

With the following parameters [1931] to [1937] initial values can be set. This can be usefull if the switching equipment was already in use before this measurement is installed. Furthermore these parameters are counting the related values during every switching process.

1931. - sum of sw. current L1 : to

1933. - sum of sw. current L3 : With these parameters initial values for the sum of the switching current for the three phases (L1-L3) can be set. Furthermore these parameters are counting the currents during every switching process.

1934. - sum of contact wear L1 : to

1936. - sum of contact wear L3 : With these parameters initial values for the sum of the contact wear for the three phases (L1-L3) can be set. Furthermore these parameters are counting the contact wear during every switching process.

1937. - switching cycles : With this parameter an initial value for the sum of the switching cycles can be set. Furthermore this parameter counts the cycle during every switching process.

1938. - max switching cycles : With this parameter a max. value for the sum of the switching cycles can be set.

With the parameters [1939] to [1950] supervision limits can be set. If a limit is reached the corresponding event (event number = parameter number) will be activated. The events can be used to trigger an alarm or binary output. A limit can be disabled by setting the value to zero.

1939. - sw. current 1.limit : to

1942. - sw. current 4.limit : There are four limits available for the sum of the switching currents. A limit is active if one of the sum (parameters [1931] to [1933]) reaches the limit value.

NOTE: The values in the ∑I kA column in the Contact wear page will show “---” if parameters [1939] to [1942] are all set to zero.

1943.- contact wear 1.limit : to

1946. - contact wear 4.limit : There are four limits available for the sum of the contact wear. A limit is active if one of the sum (parameters [1934] to [1936]) reaches the limit value.

Service Manual


1947. - switch cycles 1.limit : to

1950. - switch cycles 4.limit : There are four limits available for the sum of the switching cycles. A limit is active if the sum (parameter [1937]) reaches the limit value.

With the parameters [1951] to [1984] a curve for the calculation of the contact wear can be defined. During a switching cycle the contact wear of the circuit breaker will be calculated according to this curve. The curve is defined with one min. point and 16 points. Every point consists of one current value and the related max. Closed-Open (CO) cycle for the current at this point. The contact wear is taken as the reciprocal value in percent of the max. CO cycles for that current.

1951. - min.switching current : 1952.- max. CO cycles :

If the actual current is below this point the max. CO cycles remains the same. These two parameters are mandatory and must be set.

1953. -1.switching current : 1954.-1.max. CO cycles :

to 1983. -16.switching current : 1984.-16.max. CO cycles :

If the current is between two points the related max. CO cycles will be linearly interpolated. The points can be set in any order (the curve will sorted internally). A point will be only taken if at least one of the two values is greater zero. It is not mandatory to set all the 16 points. If the actual current is greater than the last point than the related max. CO cycles will be calculated continuously linear with a constant slope.

1985. -Timeout counter CB op. : This parameter defines the timeout value for the current measurement from the moment the actual current is decreasing until the moment the circuit breaker opens.

1986.Temp/current supervision : 1987. - record cycle time : 1988. - current average time :

Detects the max. temperatures measured via the analogue inputs 1-3 over a given record cycle time. The record cycle time can be set with parameter [1987]. The max. temperatures are stored together with the corresponding feeder average phase currents L1-L3. The current average time (0...1440 min (max. 24 h)) can be set with parameter [1988]. After each record cycle time the max. temperatures and the average currents of the last cycle are stored in the detailed protection history, and a new cycle will start. The average currents are stored in the current phase fields, and the max. temperatures are stored in the voltage phase fields of the detailed protection history.

Events: 1986 TCS active: will be set constantly if parameter [1986] = ON. 1987 TCS cycle : will be set for 1sec after each cycle time.

1989. - CB trip signal : In case that a circuit breaker OFF signal is available, this signal can be assigned to an binary input of SYMAP®. This parameter defines the binary input which is connected to the breaker ON signal. In case of breaker trip signal is recognized the actual current and voltage values(RMS) will be stored at that time in a separate memory. These values will be used for the contact wear measurement.

Service Manual

SYMAP®


3.38 ANSI FL Fault Locator

The Fault Locator calculates the distance tot he fault location after any overcurrent protection trip. The calculation is initiatedeach time that the circuit breaker is switched of by any of the protective functions ANSI 50, 50G, 51, 51G, und 67. Immediately prior to the protection trip all relevant current and voltage values are saved. The fault location will be represented in the detailed protection history subsequently to the evaluation of the measuring values.

Figure 3-101 ANSI FL Fault Locator


2390. Fault Locator : If the Fault Locator should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

2391.-spec.line ind.X [mO/km] : This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific inductive resistance X' (X' = L' 2 π f; with: specific inductance L' and frequency f) per unit length l (L' = L/l;

[mH/km] => X' = X/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a phase-to-

phase loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheets of the conductor).

2392.-spec.line res.R [mO/km] : This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific series resistance R' per unit length l (R' = R/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a

phase-to-phase loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheets of the conductor).

2391.-gnd-loop ind.X[mOhm/km] : This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific inductive resistance X' (X' = L' 2 π f; with: specific inductance L' and frequency f) per unit length l (L' = L/l;

[mH/km] => X' = X/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a phase-to-

ground loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheets of the conductor).

BACK EXIT

: ON

2391.– spec.line ind.X [mO/km]: 450

2392.– spec.line res.R [mO/km]: 350

2393.– gnd-loop ind.X[mOhm/km]: 650

2394.– gnd-loop res.R[mOhm/km]: 550

2390. Fault Locator

FF Fuse failure (voltages) Setting range:

ON/OFF

0-9999 mOhm/km

0-9999 mOhm/km

0-9999 mOhm/km

0-9999 mOhm/km

Service Manual


2391.-gnd-loop res.R[mOhm/km] : This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific series resistance R' per unit length l (R' = R/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a

phase-to-ground loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheets of the conductor).

Service Manual

SYMAP®


4 Alarm controller settings

The alarm controller has 79 independent free programmable alarm channels.

Figure 4-1 Alarm parameter mask


ALARM CHANNEL EVENT - Select : Selects an alarm channel for editing; up to 79 alarm channels can be used.

1. and 2. line : This free programmable alarm text will appear on the alarm page if the alarm is active.

- mode : The following alarm modes are available:

“OFF”: The alarm channel is disabled.

“LATCHED”: The alarm event ([0001] to [0079]) is active until the alarm disappears and the ACK-key is pressed.

“UNLATCHED”: The alarm event ([0001] to [0079]) is active until the trigger event is active.

“NO ACK”: The alarm event ([0001] to [0079]) is active until the trigger event is active. The alarm text in the LCD (also the beeper) disappears without ACK if the trigger event is not longer active.

- trigger : The alarm channel will be activated by this event.

- block by : The alarm channel is blocked if this event is active.

- delay : The alarm channel can be delayed with this time.

SYSTEM

RELAY EXIT

- 1.lime: 06.ANSI 50-1

2.line: - Inst.1.Overcur

- mode : UNLATCHED

- trigger : 1402

- block by: 508

- delay 0.7sec

- 1. group: 87

- 2. group: none

- priority: 2

- option : none

- beeper : OFF

SelectALARM CHANNEL EVENT – : 0006 Setting range: 1-79

Max. 17 characters

Max. 17 characters

OFF/LATCHED/UNLACHED/NO ACK

0-9999

0-9999

00,-999.9 sec

none, 80-99

none, 80-99

none, 1-12

none/MODEM/PRINTER/MODM+PRNT

OFF/ON

LED CONTROL

- ALARN : X

- TRIP :

- red : X

- amber :

- green :

Service Manual


Figure 4-2 shows the context of the trigger event, the block event, the delay and the ACK:

Figure 4-2 Alarm channel logic

- 1. and 2. Group : Each alarm channel can be assigned to one or two alarm groups. If one of the alarms belonging to this group is active the corresponding group event will also be activated. A maximum of twenty alarm groups (80-99) can be created.

- priority :

NOTE: Only for SYMAP® devices equipped with power management!

Through the priority settings, useful attributes can be set to the corresponding alarm channels. Additional operations such as “change to manual mode,” “start the next diesel” or “stop own aggregate” will activated after the alarm appears. Table 4-1 shows all alarm priorities and the corresponding operations that are activated after appearance of the alarm.

Table 4-1 Alarm controller

Operation after the alarm appears Alarm priority

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Change to manual mode X X X X X X X X X

Start next stand-by engine X X X X X X X X X

Immediately Stop X X

Normal Stop X

Immediately Stop after started engine tries to synchronize

X

Normal Stop after next C.B. is closed X

Only open Breaker* after started engine tries to synchronize

X

Only open Breaker* with load reduction after next C.B. is closed

X

Set the start valve max trials parameter [0632] to 10 and the cooling down time parameter [0656] to 600.0 sec

X

Normal Stop after next C.B. is closed, but without parameter [0651] (ALARM DELAY – max time)

X

Normal Stop without load reduction after started engine tries to synchronize

X

* means Shunt #1 output

S

R Q

&Trigger event

block event

SR

delay

ACK alarm aktive

Service Manual

SYMAP®


- option :

“NONE”: No action when the alarm appears

“MODEM”: The alarm will be sent automatically over a modem (if available).

“PRINTER”: The alarm will be sent automatically to a printer over Serial port 2.

“MODEM+PRINT”: The alarm will be sent automatically over a modem and to a printer.

- beeper :

“OFF”: No sound when the alarm appears

“ON”: When the alarm appears the beeper will be active until the ACK-key is pressed.

NOTE: There is a special beeper event [2918] which can be used to drive external signal devices over a binary output.

LED CONTROL . The LED control box defines the action of the alarm LEDs if the alarm occurs:

“ALARM”: The main alarm LED will be activated.

“TRIP”: The trip LED will be activated.

“red, amber, green”: (“green”: only SYMAP® BC/BCG): The multi-colored LEDs left of the LCD screen (where the alarm text is shown) will be activated. If more than one color is marked the LED will blink alternately in these colors.

Service Manual


Figure 4-3 shows the context of the latched and unlatched conditions of the alarm channel.

Figure 4-3 Context of the latched and unlatched conditions of the alarm channel

The “alarm trigger event” is the event number which activates the alarm channel. The “alarm channel event” will be active as long as the alarm is acknowledged. If the “alarm channel event ” is linked to a binary output this output will be activated in accordance to the “latched/unlatched” condition set within the alarm channel settings. The “beeper” will be activated by the “alarm trigger event” and reset after alarm acknowledgement.

NOTE: There is a special event [2936], which becomes active if a new alarm occurs. After that this event can be reset with ACK.

Alarm channel event

Alarm trigger event

Alarm output

Beeper

Acknowleedgement

UNLACHTCHED

Alarm channel event

Alarm trigger event

Alarm output

Beeper

Acknowleedgement

LACHTCHED

Alarm channel event

Alarm trigger event

Alarm output

Beeper

Acknowleedgement

LACHTCHED

Service Manual

SYMAP®


5 Special parameters

This parameter group comprises some special parameters which are only accessible through the PC – Parameter Tool (Button: EXTRAS > Special parameter).

Table 5-1 Special parameters

No. Name Default Unit Range

DISPLAY FILTER

[0074] Deadband filter 2.5 % 0.0-20.0

[0075] Frequency filter 20000 mHz/se

c 0-65535

[0090] FILTER -RPM nominal/dt 10.0 sec 0.0-999.9

[0091] - analog inputs 10.0 sec 0.0-999.9

[0092] - PT 100 60.0 sec 0.0-6553.5

BINARY INPUTS

[0055] Wirefault limit 20 LSB 0-255

[0084] Oscillation limit 150 n/sec 0-65535

COMMUNICATION

[0054] SERIAL PORT1 -Stopbits 1 - 1-2

[0057] MODBUS FC3 Byte count 1 - 1-2

LOCAL/REMOTE MODE

[0078] Select breaker mode Loc/Rem - none…Test…Loc/Rem

[0088] Change to TEST mode MANUAL - MANUAL…AUTOM.

SPECIAL PARAMETER

[0060] Current direction(gen.) forward - forward…reverse

[0082] Select extension board none - none…CMA218

[0058] Analog inp.4-add. low limit 0.0 - 0.0-6553.5

CALIBRATION PARAMETER

[0032] Uaux CAL. -X3/ 1, 2 100.0 % 0.0-999.9

[0033] Shunt1 CAL.-X2.1/18,19 100.0 % 0.0-999.9

[0034] Shunt2 CAL.-X2.1/20,21 100.0 % 0.0-999.9


0074. Deadband filter : This parameter is valid for all measure data which are outputted over the LCD, the analogous outputs and which are transferred through all communication ports. If any value falls below the setted deadband limit the value will be reset to zero. Furthermore, if the changing of any value is below the deadband limit the average builder (parameter [0111], see chapter 2.2) will plane the value.

0075. Frequency filter : This parameter filters the Gen., BUS1 and 2 frequencies. Only frequency changes below the set value (in mHz/sec) are accepted by the measuring system.

0090. FILTER -RPM nominal/dt :

NOTE: This parameter is only valid for SYMAP® XG/BCG (power management)!

With this parameter the measuring system builds an average of the diesel speed.

0091. FILTER - analog inputs : With this parameter the measuring system builds an average of the analog inputs values, except the PT 100 inputs (see chapter 2.5).

Service Manual


0092. FILTER - PT 100 : With this parameter the measuring system linearly integrates the PT100 inputs (see chapter 2.5.1). The integration time can be set with parameter [0092] (360°C jump in ? sec). The integrator will be initialised with the actual value at “Power ON” or with the F2-key on the analog inputs page (the key appears if parameter [0092] > 3.0 sec).

0055. Wirefault limit : If the measured LSB value of a binary input falls below this limit wirefault is detected (see chapter 2.6).

0084. Oscillation limit : If the changing of a binary input per seconds exceeds this limit system fail [3012] will be activated (see Appendix A2). The supervision can be disabled by setting this parameter to zero.

0054. SERIAL PORT 1 – stopbits : With this parameter the number of stopbits (1 or 2) in the transferred bytes through serial port 1 can be adjust (see chapter 2.4).

0057. MODBUS FC3 Byte count : With this parameter the number of bytes (1 or 2) of the byte count field in function code 3 of the MODBUS protocol can be adjust (see Appendix A1).

0078. Select breaker mode : With this parameter the operating (breaker) modes for the device can be selected (see chapter 2.5 in the Users manual). The following modes are available:

“none”: no modes selected; this can be used for SYMAP® XG/BCG, because for Power management usually only the AUTO/MANU. modes are used.

“Loc/Rem”: The valid modes are “Local” and “Remote”.

“Test”: The valid modes are “Local”, “Remote”, “Test Local” and “Test Remote”.

0088. Change to TEST mode : If this parameter is setted to AUTOM. and parameter [0078] to “Test” the device will switch automatically to the test mode (“Test Local” or “Test Remote”) if one breaker changes the position from IN->OUT (see chapter 2.5 in the User′s manual).

0060. Current direction (gen.) : This parameter defines the direction of the generator current.

0082. Select extension board : This parameter enables the software for various extension boards.

0058. Analog input 4 - additional low limit : With this parameter the user has the possibility to set an additional low limit for analog input 4 (see chapter 2.5). The limit is disabled if the setted value equals zero. If the value reaches this low limit, event [2935] will be set.

0032. Uaux CAL. : This parameter calibrates the Uaux measure input (see chapter 3.32).

0033. Shunt #1 CAL. : This parameter calibrates the Shunt #1 measure input (see chapter 3.32).

0034. Shunt #2 CAL. : This parameter calibrates the Shunt #2 measure input (see chapter 3.32).

Service Manual

SYMAP®


6 Maintenance, Servicing and Retesting

The devices of SYMAP® product line were designed numerically. All functions base on tested hardware and software.

Maintenance All SYMAP® devices are maintenance-free. However, there are some certain, life-limited components, which causes replacement according to the given replacement cycles listed in the table below. Following components are to be considered:

Akku, Type ML2430; for storage of data in the RAM memory. The buffering time of a fully charged accumulator (stand-by operation) is about 50 days. Manufacturer’s warranted life time of the accumulator is about 10 years.

Battery, Type CR2032, for maintenance of counting date and time. The buffering time of a fully charged battery is about 50 days.

Table 6-1 Life-limited components

Component

Type Function Failure consequences

Replacement cycle

Replacement

Akku ML2430, soldering tag

Storage of data in the RAM memory

Loss of data after complete discharge of the akkumulator

ca.every 10 years

Stucke Elektronik GmbH

Battery CR2032, soldering tag

Maintenance of counting date and time after disconnecting SYMAP® power supply

Reset of date and time to default values after complete discharge of the battery

ca.every 10 years

Stucke Elektronik GmbH

Servicing All SYMAP® devices provide extensive self supervision functions for signalling different internal faults. Replacement of the life-limited components (see table above) may be undertaken only under ESD-conform conditions at the device manufacturer’s facility. Retesting A repeating secondary test is mainly to check the function of the hardware including the wiring on a regular basis. Moreover, any non-documented changes of parameter settings can be detected. Retesting intervalls are to be allocated by the user. All repeated tests for functionality checks as simplified functionality tests and secondary protection tests as complete check of the protection system fall in the scope of the regulation, which apply to valid standards for the plant area requiring the use of SYMAP® devices.

Service Manual


Service Manual

SYMAP®


Service Manual


Stucke Elektronik GmbH Merkurring 26 22143 Hamburg Germany http://www.stuckegmbh.de

Service Manual - WordPress.com...Service Manual - 8/226 - ® SYMAP_ServiceManual_v3.0_E.docx SYMAP...

Documents

Transcript of Service Manual - WordPress.com...Service Manual - 8/226 - ® SYMAP_ServiceManual_v3.0_E.docx SYMAP...